Eqp-02b : Equipment For Ict, Multimedia, And Electronics

Tender Ulang
Basic Information
Type: Public Tender
Tender Code: 15645025
Status: Tender Ulang
Date: 5 July 2023
Year: 2023
KLPD: Kementerian Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan
Work Unit: Direktorat Sumber Daya
Procurement Type: Pengadaan Barang
Method: Tender - Pascakualifikasi Satu File - Harga Terendah Sistem Gugur
Contract Type: Harga Satuan
Financial Information
Value (Nilai Pagu): Rp 9,449,548,500
Estimated Value (Nilai HPS): Rp 9,449,548,500
Winner (Pemenang): PT Mahardika Karya
NPWP: 033300906061000
RUP Code: 41161151
Work Location: Kampus UPI, Jl. Dr. Setiabudi 229 Bandung - Bandung (Kota)
Participants: 156
Applicants
0033300906061000Rp 8,673,784,000
0024171241411000Rp 9,306,000,000
0724529920541000Rp 9,358,870,500
0736556945451000-
PT Kembara Surya Kencana
09*4**5****24**0-
PT Bawalaksana Central Industrial
06*1**2****11**0-
0638550806427000-
PT Persada Energi Jayabadi
03*3**4****14**0-
Universal Mice Production
06*3**6****01**0-
0734923741451000-
PT Kairos Pratama Karya
09*0**8****02**0-
0925275786407000-
0010612489051000-
0029092798411000-
0854283876432000-
0025343807411000-
0751020694022000-
0010612489051000-
0850607219086000-
0752048116015000-
Perdana Sukses, Pb
0078385796543000-
0010612489051000-
0902056605401000-
0761267186034000-
0019798651009000-
0733723118013000-
0831790357121000-
0031994247023000-
0953926334429000-
0802114785407000-
0838381614066000-
0421296658435000-
0019609379511000-
0628045247002000-
0316450857002000-
PT Air Box Teknologi
05*6**4****28**0-
0025147141609000-
PT Vanadia Utama
00*8**4****47**0-
PT Val Solusi Indonesia
03*4**1****11**0-
0029611084541000-
0824123186012000-
Berkah Sejahtera Mandiri
0029711330101000-
0814495578028000-
0027483502008000-
0841175565805000-
0020099412607000-
Culture Indonesia Persada
05*7**6****53**0-
0028231439606000-
0019909803652000-
0019465392911000-
0024174302306000-
0814916540005000-
Anggrek Asri Jaya
0936298587542000-
0028615821101000-
0021581095522000-
0017645896062000-
PT Asricitra Pratama
00*7**8****14**0-
CV Sayanna
09*7**2****01**0-
0821010295447000-
0769868068442000-
0024430506609000-
0014016836008000-
PT Mandiri Artha Solusi
07*1**8****15**0-
Trisaka Multi Karya
0815508015411000-
0316963750026000-
0031460165541000-
0959169855429000-
0436082135447000-
0903000743922000-
0863842829017000-
0316145788001000-
Rap Gabe Tama
09*5**9****09**0-
0749673372034000-
PT Adhikara Wiyasa Gani
09*3**8****19**0-
0769869447445000-
Pancautama_cv
00*6**6****01**0-
0904474665101000-
PT Alima Arga Karya
07*6**2****46**0-
0915271423401000-
0723138236606000-
0838406353023000-
0020021226046000-
0752582650435000-
0012169256422000-
0316953231411000-
PT Hitama Jaya Gundavindo
04*4**8****13**0-
0033412263626000-
CV Prima Elektrik
0316929884922000-
PT Sarana Bangun Indtoama
04*6**7****29**0-
Hope Infinity
03*5**3****05**0-
Sesfranvio Putra Mandiri
04*7**4****47**0-
0615841426543000-
0412245961401000-
PT Koka Indonesia
00*1**2****72**0-
0014779383511000-
0016922965029000-
0317224376423000-
0667669741216000-
CV Relasi Muda Berkarya
04*9**1****26**0-
PT Ganesa Mitra Edutama
04*4**2****21**0-
0030433981404000-
0838059285609000-
0761023159619000-
0013109087073000-
0727335770446000-
0834072548311000-
0819603598216000-
0818633471446000-
CV Multi Mitra Integra
02*0**2****29**0-
Sinar Mitra Solutions
00*7**3****35**0-
0032738924039000-
PT Berkat Kreasi Sejahtera
08*2**5****08**0-
0534386669027000-
0020089926423000-
PT Dnifaf Karya Muda
03*1**2****68**0-
0909470981101000-
PT Agathis Solution
00*6**5****09**0-
0026279646015000-
0315692772418000-
Untung Jaya Makmur
06*8**6****52**0-
0811727254323000-
0024487969018000-
0026044941018000-
0030078695015000-
0822858171541000-
PT Soludea Karya Indonesia
08*6**9****53**0-
0025067851043000-
PT Tujuh Teknologi Digital
08*3**1****61**0-
0013040100073000-
0031013766023000-
0850271875015000-
0718496524015000-
0727236390022000-
0027434331922000-
0026488718411000-
CV Creative Amico Media
06*2**7****57**0-
0851345108508000-
0317352300036000-
PT Ditek Jaya
00*3**4****38**0-
PT Nagara Multi Niaga
04*5**3****13**0-
0024862872404000-
Tiga Daya Akurasi
0722823513445000-
0747450674424000-
PT Merapi Tani Instrumen
07*9**9****43**0-
0838807691421000-
Dubay Utama
0030200737608000-
0019762640615000-
Ayooklik Airmas Perkasa
07*3**6****44**0-
0018443853005000-
0027906346428000-
0317092856015000-
0032237240643000-
0719924227609000-
0210798070411000-
0314553769451000-
0849143466009000-
Attachment
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
Company Name :                                                                                               
                                                                                                             
EQP-02B EQUIEPMENT FOR ICT, MULTIMEDIA, AND ELECTRONICS                                                      
                                                                                                             
                                                                                           Brand/Manufacturer/Model
 Item Code     Item            Tender Specification Spesifikasi Teknis Lelang Bidder’s Specification Spesifikasi Penawar
                                                                                           Offered & Country of Origin
 L02‐2‐001 Headphones    Features:                                                                           
                         ‐ Critically acclaimed sonic performance praised by top audio engineers             
                         and pro audio reviewers                                                             
                         ‐ Exceptional clarity throughout an extended frequency range, with                  
                         deep, accurate bass response                                                        
                         ‐ Circumaural design contours around the ears for excellent sound                   
                         isolation in loud environments                                                      
                         ‐ 90° swiveling earcups for easy, one‐ear monitoring                                
                         ‐ Professional‐grade earpad and headband material delivers more                     
                         durability and comfort                                                              
                         ‐ Collapsible for space‐saving portability                                          
                         ‐ Top choice for studio tracking and mixing, as well as DJ monitoring               
                         and personal listening                                                              
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Type: Min. Closed‐back dynamic                                                      
                         Driver Diameter: Min. aprox 30 mm‐50 mm                                             
                         Frequency Response: Approx. 15 ‐ 28,000 Hz                                          
                         Input Power : MAx. 1,600 mW at 1 kHz                                                
                         Sensitivity: Min. 99 dB                                                             
                         Impedance : Approx. 38 ohms‐ 55 ohms                                                
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories,                                                                
                         All Necessery cabel requirments                                                     
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         Transport to Location, Installation, Commissioning,and training,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐002 PC All In One For Lab Sound F e a t ures:                                                         
         (Apple i Mac)   FaceTime HD 1080p Camera with image signal processor M1 Audio                       
                         System six high‐fidelity speakers with subwoofer force‐cancelling Wide‐             
                         ranging stereo sound Support for spatial audio when playing music or                
                         video with Dolby Atmos Studio quality three‐microphone array with                   
                         high SNR and directional signal shaper                                              
                                                                                               Page 1 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Technical Specifications :                                                          
                         Apple M1 Chip processor : (8‐Core CPU, 7‐Core GPU) 7‐core GPU                       
                         graphics Integrated memory : 8 GB                                                   
                         Storage : min 256 GB                                                                
                         Screen Size : min. 24‐inch                                                          
                         Screen Screen Type : 4.5K 24‐inch Retina                                            
                         Display : 4480 x 2520                                                               
                         resolution : 218 pixels per inch with support for 1 billion                         
                         colors : 500 nits Brightness Wide color (P3) True Tone Technology                   
                         Size a: 54.7 x 46.1 x 14.7 cm                                                       
                         Keyboard and Trackpad Magic Keyboard                                                
                         Wi‐Fi 6 802.11ax Compatible with IEEE 802. 11a/b/g/n/ac                             
                         Bluetooth wireless technology Bluetooth 5.0                                         
                         Port : Two Thunderbolt/USB 4 ports wit support for: DisplayPort                     
                         Thunderbolt 3                                                                       
                         USB 3.1 Gen 2 (up to 10 Gb/dtk)                                                     
                         Thunderbolt 2, HDMI, DVI, dan VGA                                                   
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Keyboard and Trackpad Magic Keyboard, Magic Mouse, Cable Power.                     
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         warranty manufture                                                                  
 L02‐2‐003 GRAND PIANO   FEATURES :                                                                          
                         Stretcher Over‐Lap Integrated Design (SOLID)                                        
                         Longer Keys                                                                         
                         Steel‐reinforced keyslip & keybed                                                   
                         V‐pro plate                                                                         
                         CORE system                                                                         
                         Vertically laminated treble bridge                                                  
                         Hybrid inner rim                                                                    
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Dimention L x W x H : Approx. 215 x 154x 102 cm                                     
                         Touch White key surfaces : Min. NEOTEX                                              
                         Black key surfaces : Min. NEOTEX                                                    
                         Action : Min. Millennium III                                                        
                         Hammers: Min. All underfelted                                                       
                         Sound Soundboard : Min. Solid Spruce, Tapered                                       
                         Agraffes: 1‐54 keys                                                                 
                         Duplex scaling: Fore & Back                                                         
                         Back posts 4                                                                        
                         Exterior design Pedals Damper, Sostenuto, Soft Casters Single, Brass                
                                                                                               Page 2 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Lid props 3                                                                         
                         Softfall                                                                            
                         Music rack Position 5 positions                                                     
                         Hard Finish                                                                         
                         Lock                                                                                
                         Other features Stretcher Over‐Lap Integrated Design (SOLID)                         
                         Longer Keys                                                                         
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories,                                                                
                         Steel‐reinforced keyslip & keybed                                                   
                         V‐pro plate                                                                         
                         Piano Chair                                                                         
                         3x Pedal                                                                            
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                      
                         warranty manufturer                                                                 
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐004 UPRIGHT PIANO FEATURES:                                                                           
                         Die‐Cast Aluminum Action Brackets, Extended Key Length, Mahogany                    
                         wood core &                                                                         
                         T‐stapled, double felted hammers, Steel‐Reinforced Keyslip, Keybed                  
                         and Braces,                                                                         
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Dimention HxWxD : approx. 120 x 148 x 60 cm                                         
                         Touch White key surfaces: Min. Acrylic                                              
                         Black key surfaces: Min. Phenol                                                     
                         Hammer felts All underfelted                                                        
                         Agraffes: 1‐81 keys                                                                 
                         Sound Soundboard Solid : Min. Spruce, Tapered                                       
                         Cut off bar 2                                                                       
                         Back posts 5                                                                        
                         Exterior design Pedals Soft, Muffler, Damper                                        
                         Casters Double, Brass                                                               
                         Softfall : Fallboard                                                                
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories                                                               
                         ‐ Piano Chair                                                                       
                         ‐ 3x Pedal                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 3 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
                         Steel‐reinforced keyslip & keybed                                                   
 L02‐2‐005 KACAPI Tembang Cianjuran (1 Kacapi Tembang:                                                       
         set : Kacapi Indung & Kacapi Specifications:                                                        
         Rincik)         Ukuran dari kacapi panjangnya antara 135 – 150 cm, lebarnya antara                  
                         24‐26 cm, dan                                                                       
                         tingginya sampai gelung sekitar 40 cm, sedangkan tinggi kotak suara                 
                         (vertikal) kira‐kira 21                                                             
                         cm                                                                                  
                         Jenis dawai yang digunakan terbuat dari logam kuningan, tembaga atau                
                         baja yang                                                                           
                         memiliki berbagai ukuran. Ada empat macam ukuran dawai kuningan                     
                         yakni: (1) ukuran                                                                   
                         0,8 mm (milimeter) untuk suara terbesar; (2) 0,6 mm untuk suara                     
                         tengah; (3) 0,5 mm untuk                                                            
                         suara terendah; dan (4) 0,4 untuk nada‐nada tertinggi yang dekat                    
                         dengan posisi pemain                                                                
                         (Ubun Kubarsah, 1994: 12). Jumlah dawai terus bertambah seiring                     
                         berjalannya waktu, dari                                                             
                         9, 11, 15 dawai, hingga sekarang berjumlah 18 utas dawai                            
                         Supplied Includding                                                                 
                         standar accessories                                                                 
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐006 GAMELAN DEGUNG ( 1 Specifications :                                                               
         set Custom)     1. Matrial :Gamelan Perunggu Manufactured Pabrik Gamelan Surakarta                  
                         Jumlah Instrument:                                                                  
                         1. Bonang 14 Gamelan                                                                
                         2. Peking                                                                           
                         3. Panerus                                                                          
                         4. Saron 2 buah                                                                     
                         5. jenglong                                                                         
                         6. Kempul                                                                           
                         7. Goong                                                                            
                         8.Kendang Sunda                                                                     
                         9. Kulanter 2 Buah                                                                  
                         Suplied Includding:                                                                 
                         All Necessary Acessories ( pemukul, dll)                                            
                         Setting/Stem gamelan.                                                               
                                                                                               Page 4 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         maintenence books                                                                   
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
                         ‐                                                                                   
 L02‐2‐007 GAMELAN Pelog Salendro (1 Satu set gamelan Pelog salendro                                         
         set Custom)     Specifications :                                                                    
                         1. Material : Gamelan Perunggu manufacture Gamelan Surakarta                        
                         2. Gamelan Pahatan Ular                                                             
                         3. Gamelan Jawa Lengkap                                                             
                         4. Laras Pelog Salendro                                                             
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         All Necessary Acessories ( pemukul, dll)                                            
                         Setting/Stem gamelan.                                                               
                         maintenence books                                                                   
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐008 French Horn   Features:                                                                           
                         Intermediate F/Bb French horn with easy response and note centering,                
                         Tapered gold brass leadpipe offers a comfortable level of breath                    
                         resistance and spot‐on intonation,.472‐inch bore exhibits a warm,                   
                         focused sound                                                                       
                         Adjustable 4th rotor thumb lever for added playing comfort, 12.125‐                 
                         inch yellow brass bell yields everything from mellow soft passages to               
                         brassy loud passages,                                                               
                         Lacquer finish brings a delicate warmth to your overall sound and looks             
                         amazing, Includes a plastic shell case a mouthpiece.                                
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Type: Min. Double Horn                                                              
                         Level:Min. Intermediate                                                             
                         Key: Min. F/Bb                                                                      
                         Finish: Min. Clear Lacquer                                                          
                         Body Material: Yellow Brass                                                         
                         Bell Material: Yellow Brass                                                         
                         Bell Size: Min. Medium, 12.12"                                                      
                         Bell Type: Min. Fixed                                                               
                         Bore: 0.472" (11.98mm)                                                              
                         Wrap: Geyer                                                                         
                         Valves: 4 Solid Tapered Rotary Valves, String Linkage System                        
                                                                                               Page 5 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Leadpipe: Tapered                                                                   
                         Leadpipe Material: Min. Gold Brass                                                  
                         Mouthpiece: Min. 32C4                                                               
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,Steel‐reinforced keyslip & keybed                             
                         ‐ Case/Gig Bag: Hardshell Case                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty Manufacture.                                                               
 L02‐2‐009 TUBA          Features:                                                                           
                         This King tuba features a compact design with properly positioned                   
                         mouthpipe that makes it perfect for the beginning player. Its top action            
                         pistons are an alternative to the front action design of the 1135. Nickel           
                         plated pistons provide smooth, quick action and unmatched durability.               
                         Heavy duty wheeled case.                                                            
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Key of BBb                                                                          
                         bore : Min. 0.661 ‐ 0.640" bore                                                     
                         Min. 3 valve top action                                                             
                         Min. 14‐15" bell                                                                    
                         Min. nickel plated pistons                                                          
                         Min. clear lacquer finish                                                           
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,‐ Case                                                        
                         ‐ Mouthpiece                                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture.                                                               
 L02‐2‐010 Violoncello   Features:                                                                           
                         Ebony is a popular wood, known best for the clear, crisp attacks it is              
                         capable of producing. This wood is generally much brighter than maple               
                         and has a similar density too. Ebony however has oilier pores than                  
                         maple and extra brittle grains. As a result of the tight grains this                
                         fingerboard doesn't require any finish. This quality gives the                      
                         fingerboard a natural smooth, quick playing ability favored by many                 
                         professionals. Although there are many types of wood used to create                 
                         fingerboards ebony is the darkest of them all. The wood works                       
                         effectively throughout the instrument's range and is reliable for years.            
                                                                                               Page 6 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Finish: Min. Hand Applied Spirit Varnish                                            
                         Bridge: Min. Fitted Maple                                                           
                         Fingerboard: Min. Ebony                                                             
                         Tailpiece: Min. Ebony                                                               
                         Top Nut: Min. Ebony                                                                 
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,‐ Bow and Rosin                                               
                         ‐ Hard Case                                                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐011 Double Bass   Features :                                                                          
                         Min. Hand‐carved from select figured woods, Min. Full Ebony fittings,               
                         Min. Fine quality brass machine heads, Min.                                         
                         Individually workshop tested                                                        
                         Specifications                                                                      
                         Body & Bridge                                                                       
                         Top: Hand Carved Spruce                                                             
                         Back: Highly Figured Maple                                                          
                         Side and Ribs: Highly Figured Maple                                                 
                         Bridge: Maple                                                                       
                         Finish: Traditional Shellac Varnish                                                 
                         Neck & Fingerboard                                                                  
                         Neck: Maple                                                                         
                         Fingerboard: Ebony                                                                  
                         Hardware                                                                            
                         Machine Heads: Brass                                                                
                         Top Nut: Ebony                                                                      
                         Strings: Flexible core strings                                                      
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,‐ Bow and Case                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐012 DRUM Accoustik Features :                                                                         
                         ‐ Premium‐quality,Min. 6‐7piece shell pack                                          
                         Satin Purple Atmosphere Fade finish                                                 
                         Die‐Cast Hoops                                                                      
                                                                                               Page 7 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Min. Quick Lock Tom Brackets                                                      
                         ‐ Min. Star Cast Mounting System                                                    
                         ‐ Min. 2 x MC69 Single Tom Attachments Included                                     
                         ‐ Min. Bass Drum Spur Brackets                                                      
                         ‐ Air Cushioned Floor Tom Legs                                                      
                         Hold Tight Washer                                                                   
                         ‐ Min. Evans Heads                                                                  
                         ‐ TT/FT/SD: 6mm, 4ply Birch + 2 inner ply American Black Walnut                     
                         BD: 8mm, 5ply Birch + 2 inner ply American Black Walnut/ Dyna Hoop                  
                         2,3mm                                                                               
                         ‐ Bearing : 45 derajat                                                              
                         ‐ This tom holder features our omni‐ball system allowing for                        
                         unparalleled angle adjustment of the toms                                           
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Bass Drum : Min approx. 20‐24"                                                      
                         Tom Tom : Min approx. 8"‐14"                                                        
                         Snare Drum : approx. 14"x55"                                                        
                         Floor Tom : approx. 16"‐18"                                                         
                         cymbal Crash :approx.18"‐20"                                                        
                         cymbal ride : approx. 21"‐24                                                        
                         Hi‐HAT : approx. 14"‐15"                                                            
                         cymbal stack : approx. 12"‐13                                                       
                         cymbal chinese : approx.18‐20                                                       
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories                                                                 
                         ‐ Kick pedal                                                                        
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐013 CONDENSER MICROPHONES Features:                                                                   
         Diaphragma      ‐Large diaphragm capsule derived                                                    
                         ‐Balanced sound with enhanced presence                                              
                         ‐Cardioid pattern                                                                   
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         ‐ Studio microphone                                                                 
                         ‐ min. Large diaphragm microphone                                                   
                         ‐ min. Cardioid                                                                     
                         ‐ Frequency range: min approx. 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz                                       
                                                                                               Page 8 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Equivalent noise level : min approx. 7 dB‐A‐12db A                                
                         ‐ SPL is ideally suited for THD <0.5%2) min approx. 132‐138 dB                      
                         ‐ Nominal Impedance: min approx. 50 ‐ 200 Ohm                                       
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories, Stand Microphone, Soft casing,                                 
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐014 CONDENSER MICROPHONES Features:                                                                   
         CARDIOID For Instrument Small‐diaphragm condenser microphone with ruler‐flat frequency              
                         response                                                                            
                         Industry‐standard acoustic guitar mic — just point it at the 12th fret for          
                         instant album‐ready sound                                                           
                         Also excels on other acoustic instruments and as drum overheads                     
                         Uniform cardioid pickup pattern offers exceptional isolation with                   
                         minimum off‐axis coloration                                                         
                         Ultra‐smooth response curve ensures accurate sonic reproduction                     
                         Exhibits low noise and high output, plus a negligible level of distortion           
                         over a wide range of load impedances                                                
                         Low RF susceptibility mitigates radio interference                                  
                         Sepcification:                                                                      
                         Microphone Type : Condenser                                                         
                         Polar Pattern: min. Cardioid                                                        
                         Frequency Response : min approx. 20Hz‐20kHz                                         
                         Max SPL : approx.134‐ 136dB                                                         
                         Output Impedance :min approx. 100‐ 150 ohms                                         
                         Signal to Noise Ratio : min. 78dB                                                   
                         Self Noise : min.18‐16dB (A weighted)                                               
                         Low Cut Filter : min.80Hz (‐18dB/octave), 100Hz (‐6dB/octave)                       
                         Pads :min approx. 10dB‐20db                                                         
                         Connector : XLR                                                                     
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories, Stand Microphone, Soft casing,                                 
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
                                                                                               Page 9 of 132 
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐015 Acoustic Guitar Bassic Features :                                                                 
                         ‐ Great‐sounding guitar at an amazing price                                         
                         ‐ Traditional Spanish fan bracing provides a balanced, lively sound                 
                         ‐ Mahogany back and sides for full‐bodied frequency response                        
                         ‐ Cedar top for excellent definition and projection                                 
                         Specification:                                                                      
                         Min. All solid timber                                                               
                         full body Min. Classical Model                                                      
                         Neck: min. Mahogany                                                                 
                         Back & Sides: Min. Rosewood                                                         
                         Top: Min. Spruce                                                                    
                         Bridge : Min. Indian Rosewood                                                       
                         Fretboard: Makassar Ebony                                                           
                         Head Button :Pearloid                                                               
                         Grover Machine Head                                                                 
                         Graph Tech Tusq/Bone – Nut / Saddle                                                 
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in                                                 
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐016 Combo Amplifier Features :                                                                        
                         ‐ Dual 60W power amps drive 2 x 12‐inch speakers for wide, powerful                 
                         sound                                                                               
                         ‐ True stereo chorus that’s been featured on countless classic                      
                         recordings                                                                          
                         ‐ Vibrato that can go from a subtle warble to wild modulation                       
                         ‐ Lively spring reverb to give your tone some depth                                 
                         ‐ Bright switch for cutting through a thick mix or giving a dark‐sounding           
                         guitar an articulation boost                                                        
                         ‐ Effects loop for versatility when building a pedal setup                          
                         ‐ Footswitch jacks for chorus/vibrato, reverb, and distortion                       
                         ‐ Stereo effects loop on channel 2 for series/parallel connections                  
                         ‐ Incredibly durable road‐ready construction                                        
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Type: Min. Solid State                                                              
                                                                                               Page 10 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Number of Channels:Min. 2                                                           
                         Total Power: Max. 2 x45‐ 60W                                                        
                         Speaker Size:Min. 2 x 12"                                                           
                         EQ: Min. 3‐band                                                                     
                         Inputs: Min. 1 x 1/4"                                                               
                         Outputs: Min. 2 x 1/4"                                                              
                         Effects Loop: Yes                                                                   
                         Footswitch I/O: Min. 3 x 1/4" (chorus/vibrato, reverb, distortion)                  
                         Footswitch Included: No                                                             
                         Power Source: Fixed AC cable                                                        
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐017 Acoustic Guitar intermediate Specification & Features :                                           
                         ‐ Solid cedar top                                                                   
                         ‐ Back and sides: Min. Sapelli                                                      
                         ‐ Neck: Min. Sapelli                                                                
                         ‐ Fretboard and bridge: Min. Rosewood                                               
                         ‐ Scale: Min. 650mm (25.6")                                                         
                         ‐ Nut width: Min. 52 mm (2.05")                                                     
                         ‐ Min. Bone nut                                                                     
                         ‐ Colour: Natural gloss                                                             
                         ‐ Gig bag included                                                                  
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ Soft Casing                                                                       
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐018 Electric Guitar Features:                                                                         
                         ‐ 6‐String Thin‐Line Arch‐Top Electric Guitar & Bigsby B700 Tailpiece               
                         ‐ Body: Maple                                                                       
                         ‐ Neck: Mahogany                                                                    
                         ‐ Fingerboard: Rosewood                                                             
                         ‐ Pick‐Ups: 3x P‐90 Single Coil                                                     
                         ‐ Tuners: Wilkinson 14:1                                                            
                                                                                               Page 11 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Hardware: Gold/Nickel                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         Specification:                                                                      
                         panjang sekala: Min. 24‐3/4” (628,6mm)‐25.5"(648mm)                                 
                         material : chambered mahoni                                                         
                         body finish: Poliuretan Gloss                                                       
                         Material Neck :Mahoni 3‐Piece                                                       
                         Neck Finish : Poliuretan Satin                                                      
                         Material Fingerboard : Rosewood                                                     
                         Radius Fingerboard : 12" (304.8mm)                                                  
                         Fret wire : Jumbo                                                                   
                         Jumlah fret : 22                                                                    
                         Material mur : PPS                                                                  
                         Lebar Neck @ Fret 0/Fret ke‐12 : 41.9/52.0mm                                        
                         Ketebalan @ Fret ke‐1/Fret ke‐12: 21.0/23.9mm                                       
                         Neck Pickup : VH3n: Humbucker/Alnico V                                              
                         Bridge Pickup : VH3b: Humbucker/Alnico V                                            
                         Pengaturan : Master Volume, Master Tone (Push‐Pull, "Dry Switch")                   
                         Tombol Pickup : Lever Switch 3‐Posisi                                               
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Effect Gitar Boss Me 80                                                           
                         ‐Hard Casing                                                                        
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐019 Electric Bass Guitar Features:                                                                    
                         ‐ Nyatoh body produces a warm, resonant tone, Poplar burl top adds                  
                         attractive good looks, Walnut/maple neck sits comfortably in the hand,              
                         Jatoba fingerboard and medium frets for supreme playability,                        
                         PowerSpan, humbucking pickups serve up classic soapbar tone with no                 
                         hum, Power Tap switch lets you choose between three pickup voices,                  
                         Onboard 3‐band EQ offers extra tonal flexibility, Accu‐cast B505 bridge             
                         enables custom string spacing                                                       
                                                                                               Page 12 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Specification :                                                                     
                         Construction : Bolt‐on (6‐bolt miter neck joint )                                   
                         Panjang Skala: min. 34" (863.6 mm)                                                  
                         Material body : Alder / Maple / Alder construction                                  
                         Body Finish : Matte Translucent Black : Satin Polyurethane Dark Coffee              
                         Sunburst : Gloss Polyurethane                                                       
                         Material Neck: Maple/ Mahogany 5pcs                                                 
                         Neck Finish : Satin Polyurethane                                                    
                         Material Fingerboard : Rosewood                                                     
                         Radius Fingerboard : min 10"                                                        
                         Fret wire : Medium                                                                  
                         Fret: min. 21                                                                       
                         String Space : min. 19 mm                                                           
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐020 Electric Bass Guitar Pro Features:                                                                
                         Solid alder body provides a balanced yet punchy tonal foundation,                   
                         Stunning flamed maple top delivers brightness, bite, and sustain, YGD               
                         H5 pickups exhibit a clean, open tone with ample output and dynamic                 
                         sensitivity, Audiophile‐grade active/passive 3‐band EQ ensures                      
                         maximum sonic flexibility, 5‐piece maple/mahogany neck yields                       
                         excellent tone and stability, Refined neck joint balances strength,                 
                         vibration transfer, and upper‐fret access,                                          
                         High‐mass die‐cast bridge efficiently transfers string vibrations to the            
                         body, Headstock virtually eliminates lateral string tension for superior            
                         tuning stability and reduced overtones, Battery alert LED prevents                  
                         unexpected power, losses when you're performing onstage, Durable                    
                         plate‐mounted jack socket, Attractive natural satin matte finish                    
                         Specifications                                                                      
                         Left‐/Right‐handed: Min. Right‐handed                                               
                         Body Material: Min. Alder, Flamed Maple top                                         
                         Body Finish: Min. Satin Polyurethane                                                
                         Color: Min. Natural                                                                 
                         Neck Material: Min, 5‐piece Maple/Mahogany                                          
                         Radius: Min. 23.625"                                                                
                         Fingerboard Material: Min. Rosewood                                                 
                         Fingerboard Inlay: Min.Offset Dots                                                  
                         Number of Frets: Min. 24, Medium                                                    
                                                                                               Page 13 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Scale Length: Min. 34"                                                              
                         Nut Width: Min. 1.692"                                                              
                         Nut Material: Min. Urea                                                             
                         Bridge/Tailpiece: Min. Die‐cast                                                     
                         Tuners: Min. Die‐cast Closed Gear                                                   
                         Neck Pickup: Min. H5 Alnico V Humbucker                                             
                         Bridge Pickup: Min. H5 Alnico V Humbucker                                           
                         Controls: Min. 1 x master volume, 1 x balancer, 1 x master tone                     
                         (passive mode), 2‐way toggle passive/active switch, 3‐band active EQ                
                         Supplied Includiing :                                                               
                         Standart Accessoreis                                                                
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐021 Keyboard Amp  Features :                                                                          
                         Min. Keyboard amp for practice and performance, Min. Highly efficient               
                         150‐watt amplifier with 12" speaker and horn tweeter, Min. 4 channels               
                         including 1/4" line input channels and an XLR microphone input, Min.                
                         Stereo auxiliary input (RCA type) for connecting portable music players,            
                         Min. Stereo Link connection allows you to combine 2 KC‐400 amps for                 
                         stereo operation and more channels, Min. Subwoofer output allows                    
                         you to connect a separate sub for more bass, Min Rotary controls for                
                         adjusting channel and headphone levels, plus Low, Middle, and High EQ               
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Speaker Size: Min approx.1 x 12"‐2x10"                                              
                         Total Power: max. 40‐150W                                                           
                         EQ: min. 3‐band EQ                                                                  
                         Inputs: min. 8 x 1/4" ‐ 2x14"                                                       
                         Outputs: min. 1‐2 x 1/4" (L/mono, R), 1 x 1/4" (headphones)                         
                         Height: min approx. 17.16"‐18.56"                                                   
                         Width:min approx. 23,31"‐19.31"                                                     
                         Depth: min approx. 9.88"‐15.18"                                                     
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Cabel Power                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                                                                                               Page 14 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐022 Electric Piano Features :                                                                         
                         The Ultimate Stage Piano, Built for Live Performance, Authentic Grand               
                         Piano Sounds Designed for the Stage, Customize Piano Sounds to Suit a               
                         Performance Venue or Your Personal Style, Vintage Electric Piano                    
                         Tones Reproduced to Perfection, Set Your Inspiration Free with                      
                         Unparalleled Touch Response                                                         
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Min. 88‐key digital piano with sound engine, Min. Color LCD screen for              
                         easy visibility in low‐light situations, Min. Utilizes PHA‐4 concert                
                         keyboard with Escapement and Ebony/Ivory Feel, Min. 5 grand‐piano                   
                         types with 34 variations, Min. 5 electric piano types with 56 variations,           
                         Min. Over 1,100 sounds built‐in, including Virtual Tone Wheel organs,               
                         modern synths, vintage keyboards, and more, Min. Instant access to                  
                         standard piano and EP sounds via One Touch Piano buttons, Min.                      
                         Extensive multi‐effects processing options, Min. Storage for 200 Live               
                         Sets (combinations of layers, zones, effects, and various tone                      
                         parameters)                                                                         
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Stand Keyboard                                                                    
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,opration and maintenence books in english or                  
                         Bahasa indonesia ( if available)                                                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐023 KEYBOARD      Features :                                                                          
                         Audio interface USB 4x32 dan integrasi native ke Logic Pro, MainStage,              
                         dan Ableton Live                                                                    
                         Mic input dan vocoder bawaan powerful                                               
                         Sudah support Model Expansions, Sound Packs, Sample Packs, dan                      
                         lainnya dari Roland Cloud                                                           
                         Tersedia 15 Wave expansions dan 10 Sound Packs                                      
                         sound ZEN‐Core, SuperNATURAL, dan Virtual Tone Wheel Organ                          
                         Keyboard 61‐note design baru dengan action synth                                    
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         1. Parts :min. 16 Zones (External + Internal                                        
                         2.Tones : min approx.3000‐3500 Tones or greater                                     
                         3. Multi‐Effects: min. 16 systems, 90 types                                         
                         Part EQ: min. 16 systems                                                            
                                                                                               Page 15 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         4. Pattern Squencer : min. 16 midi track                                            
                         5. Min. 16 Grup                                                                     
                         6. Min. 8 per each track                                                            
                         7. min. SMF export/import supported                                                 
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐Stand Kyboard                                                                      
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ adaptor ac                                                                        
                         ‐ Soft/Hard Case                                                                    
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐024 DRUM ELECTRIK Features:                                                                           
                         ‐ High‐performance sound engine that enables total sound creation ‐                 
                         Reliable Hardware Various training functions to support drummers ‐                  
                         Headphone amplifier ‐ Cubase AI included                                            
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Snare : Min. pad TCS 8 inci dengan 3 zona                                           
                         Tom Pad : Min. Pad TCS 7‐8 Inci                                                     
                         Floor Pad : Min. Pad TCS 7 Inci                                                     
                         Kick Pad : Min. Pad Karet 7,5 inci dengan pad multi layer                           
                         Hi‐Hat Pad : Min. Pad 13 inci dengan 2 zona                                         
                         Crash cymbal 1 : Min. pad 12‐ 13 inci                                               
                         Crash cymbal 2 : Min. pad 13‐14 inci                                                
                         Ride cymbal : Min. Pad 12‐ 13 inci                                                  
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Cabel‐Cabel                                                                       
                         ‐ Hard Casing                                                                       
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ adaptor ac                                                                        
                         ‐ Soft/Hard Case                                                                    
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐025 Keyboard Midi Controler Specifications:                                                           
                         ‐ min. 32 velocity‐sensitive, semi‐weighted mini‐keys                               
                         ‐min. 8 backlit, assignable, velocity‐sensitive RGB pads with Note                  
                         Repeat                                                                              
                                                                                               Page 16 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐min. 4 assignable faders, knobs, and buttons for controlling virtual               
                         instrument plug‐ins                                                                 
                         ‐min. Preset and DAW buttons for auto‐mapped DAW controls and                       
                         plug‐in parameters                                                                  
                         ‐ min. Smart Chord mode lets you play sophisticated enharmonic or                   
                         custom chord voicings                                                               
                         ‐ Smart Scale mode eliminates incorrect notes, so you can solo like a               
                         virtuoso                                                                            
                         ‐ Full‐featured Arpeggiator with Type, Octave, Gate, and Swing controls             
                         ‐ Ergonomic pitch‐bend and mod wheels                                               
                         ‐ 1/4‐inch sustain pedal input                                                      
                         ‐ USB‐MIDI connection and MIDI Output for controlling external gear                 
                         ‐ Intuitive layout featuring an OLED screen for quick control edits                 
                         ‐ USB bus‐powered                                                                   
                         Suplied Including:                                                                  
                         Standard Acessories, Cabel Midi controler, soft Casing,                             
                         All Necessery cabel requirmentsmaintenence books in english or                      
                         Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                                                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐026 CPU           Features :                                                                          
                         • Solusi upgrade yang terbuka luas, dual slot SSD NVMe & dual slot                  
                         SATA.                                                                               
                         • Peningkatan performa komputasi dengan Intel Processor generasi ke‐                
                         12.                                                                                 
                         • Fleksibel untuk pengisian daya smartphone km dengan wireless                      
                         charging dock.                                                                      
                         • 2x performa grafis yang lebih baik                                                
                         Specification:                                                                      
                         • Processor : Min. 12th Gen Intel® CoreTM i7‐12700 (25Mb Cache, up                  
                         to 4.90Ghz) processor                                                               
                         • OS : Min. Windows 11 Home                                                         
                         • Memory :Min. "16 GB DDR4 3200 MHz UDIMM, Up to 32 GB of Dual‐                     
                         channel DDR4 3200 MHz"                                                              
                         • Storage : Min. 512GB M.2 2280 PCI‐E SSD                                           
                         • Graphics :Min. GeForce RTX™ 3050 8GB GDDR6                                        
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories,                                                                
                         All Necessery cabel requirments                                                     
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                                                                                               Page 17 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐027 Monitor       Features:                                                                           
                         • The only VESA certified certified HDR 400 display that makes images               
                         brighter and more realistic.                                                        
                         • Tearing‐Free with G‐Sync Compatible / AMD FreeSync Premium.                       
                         • Complete port with the latest and fastest HDMI v2 port.                           
                         • Safer and worry‐free with 3‐year Warranty including Panel + 1 Year                
                         Accidental Damage Protection*                                                       
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         • Maximum Resolution and Refresh Rate :                                             
                         ‐ Normal mode: 1920x1080@240Hz                                                      
                         • Frame Type : 3S E2E (ZeroFrame)                                                   
                         • Brightness :                                                                      
                         ‐ Native: 400nits                                                                   
                         ‐ HDR400 mode: 400nits                                                              
                         • Colors : 16.7M                                                                    
                         • Input Signal : 2xHDMI(v2.0)+ Display Port +SPK2W+ Audio out                       
                         +HDR400 + VRB + G‐Sync compatible                                                   
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Standard Acessories,                                                                
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         twarranty manufturer                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐028 SOFTWARE      Minimum System Requirements                                                         
                         macOS 11.5 or later                                                                 
                         6GB of available storage space for minimum installation or 72GB of                  
                         storage space for full Sound Library installation                                   
                         Logic Remote Minimum System Requirements                                            
                         iPad: iPadOS 14.0 or later                                                          
                         iPhone: iOS 14.0 or later*                                                          
                         iPod touch: iOS 14.0 or later*                                                      
                         * Smart Controls, Sound Library navigation, Smart Help, full mixer, and             
                         access to plug‐in controls are available only on iPad.                              
 L02‐2‐029 MUSIC NOTATION Composing, arranging, and                                                          
         SOFTWARE        publishing scores of any size;                                                      
                         creating notation worksheets and                                                    
                         exercises for education                                                             
                         Included free (requires mobile download)                                            
                         Included sampled sounds 36 GB                                                       
                                                                                               Page 18 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Over 2,000 library ideas, with the ability to capture and edit your own             
                         ideas                                                                               
                         Intelligent MIDI and MusicXML import Full features                                  
                         Sibelius Cloud Sharing Unlimited                                                    
 L02‐2‐030 KYBOARD Controler Features:                                                                       
                         The Rise 49 is an ideal controller for either stage or studio. It combines          
                         the playability of a performance instrument with the portability and                
                         versatility of a MIDI controller.                                                   
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Dimensions : 49 Keywave playing surface (WxDxH) : Approx.83.4 x 20.1                
                         x 2.3 cm                                                                            
                         Connectivity & Ports:                                                               
                         ‐ 3.5mm TRS MIDI Output                                                             
                         ‐ Continuous foot pedal input (6.35mm TRS)                                          
                         ‐ USB‐C port (Connection and Charging)                                              
                         ‐ Class compliant MIDI over USB and connection : Bluetooth                          
                         Wattage: max. 10 watt                                                               
                         Battery:                                                                            
                         8 hour battery life                                                                 
                         3 hour charge time                                                                  
                         Material : Silicone                                                                 
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         All standart Acessories:                                                            
                         Bespoke soft case                                                                   
                         1. Seaboard RISE 2                                                                  
                         2. Equator2                                                                         
                         3. ROLI Studio                                                                      
                         4. Ableton Live Lite                                                                
                         5. ROLI Dashboard                                                                   
                         6. USB‐A to USB‐C cable                                                             
                         7. 3.5mm TRS to MIDI DIN Dongle                                                     
                         8. Quick Start Guide                                                                
                         9. One Year Full Warranty                                                           
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         warranty manufturer                                                                 
 L02‐2‐031 Mixer Console Features :                                                                          
                         Rich, vibrant sound from 16 Midas preamps, Incredibly strong yet                    
                         lightweight, thanks to carbon fiber, aluminum, and steel construction,              
                         Outstanding signal path with 48kHz digital conversion                               
                         Impeccable sound quality throughout your signal path, with time‐                    
                         aligned and phase‐coherent mix buses                                                
                                                                                               Page 19 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         , Best‐in‐class motorized faders rated at over 1 million life cycles                
                         , 32 channels of live recording and playback via a pre‐installed Klark              
                         Teknik DN32‐LIVE expansion module                                                   
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Type: Min. Digital Mixer                                                            
                         Channels: Min. 40 Ch                                                                
                         Inputs ‐ Mic Preamps: Min. 16 x XLR                                                 
                         Phantom Power: Min. 48V, Switchable per Input                                       
                         Inputs ‐ Line: Min. 1 x Dual RCA Stereo (aux)                                       
                         Inputs ‐ Other: Min. 6 x 1/4" TRS (aux)                                             
                         Outputs ‐ Main: Min. 8 x XLR (main), 2 x 1/4" TRS (monitor)                         
                         Outputs ‐ Other: Min. 6 x 1/4" TRS (aux), 1 x Dual RCA Stereo (aux)                 
                         Busses/Groups: Min. 25 time‐aligned/phase‐coherent mix buses, 8 DCA                 
                         groups                                                                              
                         Talkback: Min 1 x XLR                                                               
                         MIDI I/O:Min. In/Out/USB                                                            
                         Data I/O: Min. 1 x EtherCon (Ultranet), 2 x EtherCon (AES50), 1 x                   
                         Ethernet                                                                            
                         Headphones: Min. 2 x 1/4" TRS (stereo)                                              
                         USB: Min. 1 x Type B, 1 x Type A                                                    
                         Computer Connectivity: Min. USB, Ethernet                                           
                         Faders: 16 x Input Faders, 1 x Main Fader                                           
                         A/D Resolution: Min. 24‐bit/48kHz                                                   
                         EQ Bands: min. 4‐band EQ                                                            
                         Effects: Min. 8 x Stereo FX Engines                                                 
                         Signal Processing: Min. Gate, Compressor: Min. 100‐band RTA, 100                    
                         scenes, 100 Snippets, 32‐bit/48kHz SD Card recording                                
                         Supplied Includiing :                                                               
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if apailable)                    
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         warranty manufturer                                                                 
 L02‐2‐032 Desktop Pc for Recording Features :                                                               
         Mac Studio (Mac Studio + Apple M1 Ultra chip                                                        
         Monitor Studio with magic 20‐core CPU with 16 performance cores and 4 efficiency cores              
         keyboard + Magic mouse) 48‐core GPU                                                                 
                         32‐core Neural Engine                                                               
                         800GB/s memory bandwidth                                                            
                         Media engine                                                                        
                         Hardware‐accelerated H.264, HEVC, ProRes and ProRes RAW                             
                         Two video decode engines                                                            
                         Four video encode engines                                                           
                                                                                               Page 20 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Four ProRes encode and decode engines                                               
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Specifications :                                                          
                         Processor: min. M1 Ultra with 20‐core CPU, 64‐core GPU and 32‐core                  
                         Neural Engine                                                                       
                         memory : min. 128GB unified                                                         
                         storage : min. 2TB SSD                                                              
                         Front: Two Thunderbolt 4 ports, one SDXC card slot                                  
                         Port : Four Thunderbolt 4 ports, two USB‐A ports, one HDMI port, one                
                         10Gb Ethernet port, one 3.5mm headphone jack                                        
                         Monitor Studio: 27 inch Retina 5k                                                   
                         Resolution: 5120 x 2880                                                             
                         Brightness: 600 nit                                                                 
                         camera : 12 MP Ultra Wide with 122° field of view                                   
                         Technology: True Tone                                                               
                         Magic Keyborad and Magic Mouse                                                      
                         802.11ax Wi‐Fi 6 wireless networking                                                
                         IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac compatible                                                    
                         Bluetooth 5.0 wireless technology                                                   
                         10Gb Ethernet (Nbase‐T Ethernet with support for 1Gb, 2.5Gb, 5Gb,                   
                         and 10Gb Ethernet using RJ‐45 connector)                                            
                         Mac OS                                                                              
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         mouse pad, power cord, Thunderbolt cable, magic, keyboard & magic                   
                         Mouse                                                                               
 L02‐2‐033 Electrik Guitar Pro Features:                                                                     
                         • Two Tim Shaw‐designed ShawBucker humbucking pickups                               
                         • String‐through‐body Telecaster bridge with bent steel saddles                     
                         • New modern "Deep C"‐shaped neck profile                                           
                         • Bone nut; 22 narrow‐tall frets for easier bending                                 
                         • Treble bleed circuit maintains highs when reducing volume                         
                         • Includes Elite Molded hardshell case                                              
                         Specification :                                                                     
                         Neck Material: Min. Maple                                                           
                         Neck Shape: Min. Modern "Deep C"                                                    
                         Fingerboard Material: Min. Rosewood                                                 
                         Number of Frets: Min. 22                                                            
                         Nut Material: Min. Bone                                                             
                         Position Inlays: Min. White Dot                                                     
                         Truss Rod Nut: Min. 1/8" American Series                                            
                         Neck Finish: Min. Satin Urethane Finish on Back of Neck with Gloss                  
                         Urethane Headstock Face                                                             
                         Scale Length: Min. 25.5" (648 mm)                                                   
                                                                                               Page 21 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Fingerboard Radius: Min. 9.5" (241 mm)                                              
                         Fret Size: Min. Narrow Tall                                                         
                         Nut Width: Min. 1.685" (42.8 mm)                                                    
                         Truss Rod: Min. Bi‐Flex                                                             
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories, Strap                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐034 CONDENSER MICROPHONES Features :                                                                  
         For General Studio ‐ Three Attenuation Levels (‐6/‐12/‐18db)                                        
                         ‐ Three swichable different bass‐cut filters                                        
                         ‐ Nine selectable polar paterens                                                    
                         ‐ Overload warning with audio peak hold LED                                         
                         Spesifications :                                                                    
                         ‐ Polar Patterns : Min. Cardioid, Figure of eight, Hypercardioid,                   
                         Omnidirectional, and Wide Cardioid                                                  
                         ‐ Audio frequency bandwidth: Min approx. 20 ‐ 20000 Hz                              
                         ‐ Equivalent noise level: Min. 6 dB‐A                                               
                         Sensitivity: Min. 23 mV/Pa                                                          
                         ‐ Signal to Noise : Min. 88 dB‐A                                                    
                         ‐ Preattenuation Pad: Min. ‐6; ‐12; ‐18 dB                                          
                         ‐ Bass cut filter: Min.160; 80; 40 Hz                                               
                         ‐ Electrical impedance : Min. 200 Ohms                                              
                         ‐ Recommended load impedance: Min. 2200 Ohms                                        
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐035 Overhead Microphone Features :                                                                    
                         True condenser transducer                                                           
                         Gold sputtered 1/2" Capsules                                                        
                         Heavy duty satin‐nickel‐plated body                                                 
                         Low Noise                                                                           
                         Full Frequency Response                                                             
                         Custom WS5 Wind Shield                                                              
                         Custom RM5 Stand Mount                                                              
                         Surface‐mount transformerless circuitry                                             
                         Requires phantom power                                                              
                                                                                               Page 22 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Microphone Type: Min. Condenser                                                     
                         Polar Pattern: Min. Cardioid                                                        
                         Diaphragm Size: Min. 0.5" (12.5mm)                                                  
                         Frequency Response: Min. 20Hz‐20kHz                                                 
                         Max SPL: Min. 143dB                                                                 
                         Output Impedance: Min. 100 ohms                                                     
                         Signal to Noise Ratio: Min. 78dB (A weighted)                                       
                         Self Noise: Min. 16dB (A weighted)                                                  
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐036 Electrik Guitar intermediate Specifications:                                                      
                         Body shape: Min. Double cutaway                                                     
                         Body type: Min. Solid body                                                          
                         Body material: Min. Solid wood                                                      
                         Top wood: Min. Flame Maple                                                          
                         Body wood: Min. Alder                                                               
                         Body finish: Min. Gloss                                                             
                         Orientation: Min. Right handed                                                      
                         Neck shape: Min. C modern                                                           
                         Neck wood: Min. Maple                                                               
                         Joint: Min. Bolt‐on                                                                 
                         Scale length: Min. 26,5 ‐ 25.5 in.                                                  
                         Truss rod: Min. Dual‐action                                                         
                         Neck finish: Min. Gloss                                                             
                         Fingerboard                                                                         
                         Material: Min. Maple                                                                
                         Radius: Min. 9.5 in.                                                                
                         Fret size: Min. Medium jumbo                                                        
                         Number of frets: Min. 22                                                            
                         Inlays: Min. Dot                                                                    
                         Nut width/material 1.69 in. (43 mm) Synthetic Bone                                  
                         Active or passive pickups: Min. Passive                                             
                         Series or parallel: Min. Parallel                                                   
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories, Strap                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                                                                                               Page 23 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
                         ‐ Hard Case                                                                         
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
 L02‐2‐037 Electrik Piano Features :                                                                         
                         The Ultimate Stage Piano, Built for Live Performance, Authentic Grand               
                         Piano Sounds Designed for the Stage, Customize Piano Sounds to Suit a               
                         Performance Venue or Your Personal Style, Vintage Electric Piano                    
                         Tones Reproduced to Perfection, Set Your Inspiration Free with                      
                         Unparalleled Touch Response                                                         
                         Technical Specifications :                                                          
                         Min. 88‐key digital piano with SuperNATURAL sound engine, Min. Color                
                         LCD screen for easy visibility in low‐light situations, Min. Utilizes               
                         Roland's flagship PHA‐4 concert keyboard with Escapement and                        
                         Ebony/Ivory Feel, Min. 5 SuperNATURAL grand‐piano types with 34                     
                         variations, Min. 5 SuperNATURAL electric piano types with 56                        
                         variations, Min. Over 1,100 sounds built‐in, including Virtual Tone                 
                         Wheel organs, modern synths, vintage keyboards, and more, Min.                      
                         Instant access to standard piano and EP sounds via One Touch Piano                  
                         buttons, Min. Extensive multi‐effects processing options, Min. Storage              
                         for 200 Live Sets (combinations of layers, zones, effects, and various              
                         tone parameters)                                                                    
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐038 Speaker Studio Monitor Features :                                                                 
                         Min. Focal's best‐selling studio reference monitor, Min. Hallmark‐Focal             
                         inverted‐dome tweeter, Min. for high efficiency, precision, and energy,             
                         Min. Employs a rigid Beryllium tweeter, Min. for Focal's best‐in‐range              
                         tweeter performance, Min. "W" composite sandwich cone permits                       
                         optimization of the frequency response curve                                        
                         Specifications :                                                                    
                         Frequency response: 40Hz‐40kHz                                                      
                         Maximum SPL: 115dB SPL (peak @ 1m)                                                  
                         Input Type/Impedance: symmetrical/10 kOhms                                          
                         Input Connector: XLR                                                                
                                                                                               Page 24 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Sensitivity: Adjustable, +4dBu or ‐10dBV                                            
                         Bass/mid‐range: 2x150W rms, BASH technology                                         
                         Treble: 100W rms, AB class                                                          
                         Electric supply: 230V (2A fuse), 115V (4A fuse),                                    
                         Removable IEC supply wire                                                           
                         Input‐sensitivity selector                                                          
                         Mid‐range speaker selector (right/left)                                             
                         Adjustable tweeter and woofer levels by potentiometer                               
                         Power on/off                                                                        
                         Voltage selector                                                                    
                         Power on LED                                                                        
                         Woofer: 2x6W4370B Focal "W" composite sandwich cone 6‐1/2"                          
                         (16.5cm) speaker                                                                    
                         Tweeter: TB871, Focal inverted dome tweeter in Beryllium                            
                         Transducer shielding: Integral through cancellation magnets or by                   
                         magnet design                                                                       
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐039 Broadcast Tronic Ceiling FEATURE : pantograph extensible, each pantograph supports a load of      
         Lighting        up to 10kg using only the friction device, rail carriages with brake                
                         system for unwanted movements of pantographs or tracks, rails                       
                         length: 3m5 rails (2 fixed, 3 movable),rubber wheels with metal ball                
                         bearings ensure safe operation with loads of up to 15 kg. silent and                
                         smooth movements due to rubberized wheels and bearings, metal                       
                         made parts (aluminum & steel), all components are black painted to                  
                         eliminate unwanted reflections                                                      
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION :                                                           
                         2 Permanet Bar (length) : min. 300 cm3                                              
                         Moving BAR (length) : min. 300 cm                                                   
                         Pantograph : min. 4 pcs                                                             
                         Pantograph (Length) : approx min 40 up to 200 cm                                    
                         Pantograph (payload) : approx 15 kg                                                 
                         Maximum system load: 60 kg                                                          
                         SUPPLIED INCLUDING :                                                                
                         5 x rails 3m length                                                                 
                         4 x pantograph include safety cable                                                 
                         4 x rail carriage for pantograph                                                    
                                                                                               Page 25 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         4 x double carriage for rails                                                       
                         4 x safety steel wire                                                               
                         4 x double ended spigot pin 16mm (5/8")6 x ceiling fixing plate for rails           
                         8 x rail cable carriage                                                             
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         available)                                                                          
                         Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                       
                         8 x rail end stoppers1 x user manual                                                
 L02‐2‐040 Clip on lavalier Features:                                                                        
                         Clip‐on design for easy attachment to clothingOmnidirectional pickup                
                         pattern captures sound evenly from all directionsCompatible with                    
                         Sennheiser Evolution Wireless G3 and G4 bodypack                                    
                         transmittersLightweight and unobtrusive design^                                     
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Transducer principle: Pre‐polarized condenser                                       
                         microphone Frequency response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz                                      
                         Pickup pattern: Omnidirectional Sensitivity: 6 mV/Pa                                
                         Max SPL: 110 dB SPL                                                                 
                         Impedance: 1 kΩ                                                                     
                         Operating voltage: 1.5V‐10V                                                         
                         Cable length: 1.6 ft (0.5 m)                                                        
                         Connector: 3.5 mm jack plug                                                         
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐041 Transmitter   Features:                                                                           
                         Easy to use and operate with simple, intuitive controls Rugged, all‐                
                         metal construction for durability and reliabilityPower saving mode                  
                         helps to extend battery lifeCan be used with a variety of lavalier,                 
                         headset, and handheld microphonesCompatible with the Sennheiser                     
                         Evolution Wireless G4 system for easy integration into existing setups              
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Operating frequency range: A: 470 ‐ 516 MHz                                         
                         Power supply: 2 AA batteries or BA 2015 accupack                                    
                         Battery life: Up to 8 hours                                                         
                         RF output power: min. 30 mW                                                         
                         Nominal deviation:approx ±48 kHzTHD,                                                
                         total harmonic distortion: < 0.9%                                                   
                         Audio frequency response: approx. 25Hz ‐ 18kHz                                      
                                                                                               Page 26 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Audio input connector: 3.5 mm jack                                                  
                         Operating temperature: ‐10°C to +55°C                                               
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐042 Tripod Roller #1 Features:                                                                        
                         Made of heavy‐duty aluminum and steel for durability and strength5"                 
                         locking wheels with brakes for easy movement and stabilitystability and             
                         ease of movement for photographers and videographers. It is designed                
                         to work with most tripod brands and can support up to 50 pounds of                  
                         gear.Built‐in tripod plate for quick and easy mountingCompatible with               
                         most tripod brands,Can support up to 50 pounds of gear, including                   
                         cameras, lenses, and lighting equipmentFolding design for easy                      
                         transportation and storage                                                          
                         Technical Specification :                                                           
                         Height of typical tripod, installed can range : Approx 34.25″ to 46.50″             
                         Maximum Load Capacity: 33lbs (15kg)                                                 
                         Compatible with most tripod legs and feet                                           
                         Length : min 18″(450mm)                                                             
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐043 Tripod Statis Features:                                                                           
                         Made of high‐quality aluminum for durability and lightweight                        
                         portabilityTwin‐leg design provides stability and smooth                            
                         movementAdjustable legs and wheels allow for use on uneven                          
                         surfacesFolding design for easy transportation and storageCan support               
                         up to 55 pounds of gear, including cameras, tripods, and lighting                   
                         equipmentCompatible with Manfrotto tripod heads and accessoriesGS                   
                         (Ground Spreader) version provides additional stability on uneven                   
                         surfaces                                                                            
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         Material : Aluminum                                                                 
                         Min Height : 46.5 cm                                                                
                         Maximum Height: 171 cm                                                              
                                                                                               Page 27 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Head Type: Video/Fluid Head                                                         
                         Leg Sections: 3                                                                     
                         Legs Tube Diameter : 16, 25 mm                                                      
                         Quick Release:Yes                                                                   
                         Counter balanced Weight:7.5 kg                                                      
                         Center of gravity : min. 55 mm                                                      
                         Spreader low level ‐ variable arm length                                            
                         Closed Length : min. 84 cm                                                          
                         Ball Flat 75 Ball                                                                   
                         Accessory Compatibility : 502HLV; 509HLV; 114MV; 181B; 537SPRB;                     
                         565                                                                                 
                         Top Attachment : 1/4″ screw, 3/8″ screw                                             
                         Powered by (batteries): Lithium                                                     
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐044 Video Switcher Features:                                                                          
                         Multi‐Format Video Switcher for HDMI and RGB/Component Video                        
                         4 Scaled HDMI Inputs for Connecting Laptops and Mobile Devices                      
                         Picture‐in‐Picture and Picture‐by‐Picture Multi‐Viewer Functions                    
                         Chroma‐Key and Luma‐Key Functions for Virtual Backgrounds                           
                         Includes 6 Flexible T‐fader Channel Banks                                           
                         Dual Output Bus with Preview and Program Outputs                                    
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Inputs: 8 x HDMI (4 x scaled), 1 x RGB/Component (auto‐detecting), 1 x              
                         RGB/Component (switchable)                                                          
                         Outputs: 3 x HDMI (outputs 1 & 2 support scaling), 1 x                              
                         RGB/Component, 1 x RGB/Component (mirrored)                                         
                         Audio Inputs: 8 x HDMI embedded audio, 2 x stereo mini‐jack audio                   
                         Audio Outputs: 3 x HDMI embedded audio, 1 x stereo mini‐jack audio                  
                         Control: 1 x RS‐232C, 1 x Ethernet                                                  
                         SuppliedIncludding:                                                                 
                         AC Cable                                                                            
                         Operating Instructions                                                              
 L02‐2‐045 Teleprompter  Features:                                                                           
                         Lightweight and Portable DesignLarge and Clear 15 inch ScreenEasy‐to‐               
                         Use and AdjustIdeal for Professional Video and Film ProductionWorks                 
                         with all Tripod Mounted Video Cameras^                                              
                                                                                               Page 28 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Screen Size: Max. 15 inches (375mm)                                                 
                         Distance: Max. 33.5 inches (851mm)                                                  
                         Distance: Min. 10.2 inches (259mm)                                                  
                         Compatibility: All Tripod Mounted Video Cameras                                     
                         Dimensions: approx 292 x 240 x 63mm                                                 
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         Teleprompter Unit AC Power Adaptor                                                  
                         6.56ft (2m) HDMI Cable                                                              
                         Mirror Hood                                                                         
                         Remote Control                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐046 LiDaR Scanner Features:                                                                           
                         12.9‐inch Liquid Retina display with ProMotion technologyA12Z Bionic                
                         chip with Neural Engine for advanced performance and graphicsLiDAR                  
                         Scanner for improved AR experiencesFive‐element lens and 12‐                        
                         megapixel True Tone flash for stunning photos and videosWi‐Fi and LTE               
                         Advanced for fast, reliable internet connectivityFace ID for easy and               
                         secure authentication^                                                              
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Display: 12.9‐inch Liquid Retina                                                    
                         Resolution display (2732 x 2048)                                                    
                         Processor: A12Z Bionic chip with Neural Engine                                      
                         Storage: 512GB                                                                      
                         Connectivity: Wi‐Fi (802.11a/b/g/n/ac),                                             
                         Bluetooth 5.0                                                                       
                         Operating System: iPad OS                                                           
                         14Battery Life: Up to 10 hours of surfing the web on Wi‐Fi, watching                
                         video, or listening to music                                                        
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         ‐ Standard Acessories,                                                              
                         iPad Pro, USB‐C to USB‐C Cable USB‐C Power Adapter                                  
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
                                                                                               Page 29 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐047 Generator     Features:                                                                           
                         Super quiet operationEasy to use with electric start and optional                   
                         remote startAdvanced inverter technology for stable, high‐quality                   
                         powerFuel efficient, runs up to 8.1 hours on 3.1 gallons of                         
                         fuelConvenient parallel operation capability                                        
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Displacement: min. 196 cc                                                           
                         AC Output: max. 3000 watts (25 amps)                                                
                         DC Output: 8 amps                                                                   
                         Noise Level: max. 57 decibels (at rated load, 7 meters)                             
                         Fuel Tank Capacity:min. 3.1 gallons                                                 
                         Run Time: approx. 8.1 hours (at 1/4 rated load)                                     
                         Starting System: Recoil                                                             
                         Dimensions: approx. L 20.1" x W 17.3" x H 17.9"                                     
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         All standart acessories                                                             
                         generator Oil drain funnel                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐048 Hammer Driver Features:                                                                           
                         Compatible with Makita 18V Lithium‐Ion batteries                                    
                         Two speed transmission for a range of applications                                  
                         1/2" metal single sleeve ratcheting chuck for quick and easy bit                    
                         changes                                                                             
                         Compact and lightweight design for reduced operator fatigue                         
                         LED light illuminates the work area                                                 
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Voltage: 18V                                                                        
                         Battery Type: Lithium‐Ion                                                           
                         No Load Speed: approx. 0‐400 & 0‐1,500 RPM                                          
                         Blows Per Minute:approx. 0‐7,000 & 0‐28,000 BPM                                     
                         Max Torque: 480 in.lbs.                                                             
                         Chuck Type: 1/2" Metal Single Sleeve Ratcheting Chuck                               
                         Max. Fastening Torque: Hard: 480 in.lbs. / Soft: 350 in.lbs.                        
                         Dimensions: approx. 9‐7/8" (L) x 3‐1/2" (W) x 9‐1/2" (H)                            
                         Weight: 4.0 lbs. (with battery)                                                     
                                                                                               Page 30 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supply includes:                                                                    
                         Cordless Hammer Driver Drill                                                        
                         Battery                                                                             
                         Charger                                                                             
                         Tool Case                                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐049 Air Compressor FEATURE :                                                                          
                         Air brushed compressor                                                              
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Power : max 1/6 HP (100 watts)                                                      
                         Maximum Rotation : min. 1450 RPM                                                    
                         Wind Output : min. 20 ‐ 23 Liters per Minute                                        
                         Auto Start / Stop : approx. 3 Bars / 4 Bars                                         
                         SUPPLIED INCLUDING :                                                                
                         All Standar Accesories                                                              
                         compressor hose 6 meters, air druster 3 blows                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐050 PROFESSIONAL  FEATURES                                                                            
         CINEMATOGRAPHY CAMERA S‐Log 3 Preset and User 3D LUT Compatibility 16‐bit RAW data output           
                         Various types of batteries for a wide range of applications Proxy                   
                         Recording movies with 10‐bit depth and 4:2:2 color sampling Built in                
                         ND Filter Professional connectivity 16‐bit SDI RAW output Architecture              
                         that prevents death due to high temperatures All‐Intra Encoding                     
                         available Support Real‐time Eye AF and Face Detection                               
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Full‐frame Min : 35mm                                                               
                         Resolution : Min 12.9 megapixels                                                    
                         ISO : Approx 320 to 409600                                                          
                         DCI 4K: Approx 1 to 60 fps                                                          
                         UHD: Approx 1 Up to 120 fps 1080p: Approx Up to 240 fps XAVC‐I 4:2:2                
                         10‐Bit                                                                              
                         Media Type : SD Card dual Slots                                                     
                         Supplied Inclidding:                                                                
                         All Standar Accesories                                                              
                         AC Adapter (1), Handel (1),Power cable (1), USB‐C Cable (1), Cold shoe              
                                                                                               Page 31 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         kit (1), LCD Monitor (1), Battery pack (1), Battery charger (1), Handheld           
                         Remote Control (1), Before Using This Unit (1), LCD Hood (1), Lens                  
                         mount cap (1), Handle connector cap (1)                                             
                         compressor hose 6 meters, air druster 3 blows                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run                     
 L02‐2‐051 SEMI‐PROFESSIONAL FEATURES:                                                                       
         CINEMATOGRAPHY CAMERA color cinematic S‐Cinetone                                                    
                         10‐Bit 4:2:2 XAVC S‐I,16‐Bit Raw Output S‐Cinetone/S‐Log3/HLG, 15+                  
                         Stops                                                                               
                         Proxy recording for efficient editing                                               
                         Mounting accessories without Adapter rig Adaptor                                    
                         Full‐frame performance with high sensitivity and wide dynamic range                 
                         High performance image‐processing engine                                            
                         4K (QFHD) high‐frame‐rate 120fps3 recording                                         
                         Cinematic colour science with S‐Cinetone™                                           
                         Enhanced mobility for solo operation                                                
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Full Frame :Min 35mm (35.6 x 23.8 mm),                                              
                         PIXELS: Approx. MIN : 12.9 x 10.2 megapixels                                        
                         ISO : Approx 80‐102400 equivalent                                                   
                         ISO : Approx numbers up to ISO 409600                                               
                         I/O : CFexpress Type A / SD card (x2), Simult. Rec, Sort, Auto Switch               
                         Media, Copy                                                                         
                         LCD : MIN 7.5cm (3.0‐type) type TFT, approx. 1.44M dots, Opening                    
                         Angle:Approx. 176 deg., Rotation Angle:Approx. 270 deg.                             
                         E Mount                                                                             
                         SUPPLIED INCLUDING :                                                                
                         All Necessary Accessory                                                             
                         shoe cap, Accessory shoe kit, Battery Charger BC‐QZ1, Body cap,                     
                         Handle shoe cap, Power cord, Rechargeable Battery NP‐FZ100, USB‐A                   
                         to USB‐C cable (USB 3.2), XLR handle unit,                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐052 PROFESSIONAL  FEATURES                                                                            
         CINEMATOGRAPHY CAMERA Two‐handed shoulder kit, compatible with the original trigger grip.           
         SET RIG         Power supply solution, allowing for long‐time shooting. Ergonomically               
                         designed silicone shoulder pad for a comfortable shooting                           
                         experience, Ergonomically designed silicone shoulder pad for a                      
                                                                                               Page 32 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         comfortable shooting experience.                                                    
                                                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Dimensions : Approx: 251 x 98 x 51mm                                                
                         Material: Aluminum Alloy                                                            
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standar Accessories                                                             
                         1 x Handgrip Adapter 3403                                                           
                         2 x Extension Arm 1870                                                              
                         1 x 15mm Rods 1049                                                                  
                         1 x 15mm Rods 1050                                                                  
                         1 x Lens Support 2681                                                               
                         1 x Shoulder Pad 2837                                                               
                         1 x Top Plate 3186                                                                  
                         1 x LCD Screen Adapter 1831                                                         
                         1 x Wooden Grip 1891                                                                
                         1 x V Mount Battery Plate 2991                                                      
                         1 x D‐Tap Power Cable 2932                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐053 SEMI‐PROFESSIONAL                                                                                 
         CINEMATOGRAPHY CAMERA FEATURES                                                                      
         SET RIG         Dengan ekosistem lengkap yang bisa ditambahkan                                      
                         Integrated Design. Half Cage & Full Cage                                            
                         Compatible Top Handle                                                               
                         High Compatibility                                                                  
                         Compatible With ARCA Quick Release                                                  
                         Top Mounting Plate                                                                  
                         Vertical Mode                                                                       
                         Modular Design                                                                      
                         Half Cage                                                                           
                         Left Side Arm                                                                       
                         Multi‐Functional Attachment                                                         
                         Easily Switch Between Horizontal & Vertical Operation                               
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         REQUIRED                                                                            
                         Dimensions: approx. 7 x 6 x 3.5 inches                                              
                         Materials: Aluminum alloy, stainless steel                                          
                         Color: Black/Tactical Gray                                                          
                                                                                               Page 33 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         * Baseplate ROD 15mm                                                                
                         * Choice of various kinds of top and side handles                                   
                         1:Full Camera Cage for FX3 – Black(TA‐T13‐FCC‐B)*1                                  
                         2:HDMI Cable Clamp Attachment FX3 ‐Black(TA‐T13‐CC‐B)*1                             
                         3:HDMI Male to HDMI Female Cable (17cm)(TCB‐HDM‐HDF‐17)*1                           
                         4:Tiltaing Advanced Left Side Handle Attachment Type VI ‐Black(TA‐                  
                         AHA6‐L‐B)*1                                                                         
                         5: Tiltaing Left Side Advanced Power Handle with Run/Stop (F570                     
                         Battery) ‐Black(TA‐LRH‐57‐B)*1                                                      
                         6:Advanced Side Handle Run/Stop Cable for Sony a6/a7/a9 Series(RS‐                  
                         TA3‐SYA)*                                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐054 RIG SET SHOULDER RIG FEATURES                                                                     
                         1. It could be used in a run‐and‐gun operation.                                     
                         2. Each handle can be moved independently so you can have one                       
                         handle further away from your body than the other handle.                           
                         3. The handle could be locked tight via the wingnut                                 
                         The CoolHandles V5 strong enough for 15mm shoulder rig system.                      
                         Each handle can move together pushing away from your body or                        
                         towards your body.                                                                  
                         Each handle can move independently so you can have one grip further                 
                         away from your body then the other grip.                                            
                         The width between the 2pcs handle is MAX 30cm.                                      
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Product Dimensions: approx. 300x190x31 mm                                           
                         rail block : min. 15mm 90 degree                                                    
                         Minimum Material(s): Aluminum Alloy/Rubber                                          
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         1 x 30cm Rod                                                                        
                         1 x 15mm 90‐degree rail block 922                                                   
                         1 x 1626                                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐055 RIG SET MATTE BOX FEATURES                                                                        
                         There is a choice of two filter options, providing additional protection            
                                                                                               Page 34 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         to the lens and can help prevent light flashes, providing lens stability            
                         (does not support lenses with front element telescopes).                            
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Swing Away Design : min. 15mm                                                       
                         Rod Adapter 4x4"" Filter Holders                                                    
                         Minimum Top Flag/Eyebrow for Flare Protection 80, 90, 110mn                         
                         Diameter Lens Adapters Fabric Lens Donut/Nun's Knickers Lightweight                 
                         Construction                                                                        
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         (1) Mini Matte box body (1) Mini Matte carbon fiber top flag box (1)                
                         handle bar 15mm single bottom Tiltaing (1) 15x100mm black aluminum                  
                         rod (2) Allen lock (1) Matte box Mini 15mm single rod support                       
                         attachment (1) ring adapter 67mm (1) 72mm ring adapter (1) 77mm                     
                         ring adapter (1) 82mm adapter ring                                                  
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐056 RIG SET ND FILTER                                                                                 
                         FEATURES                                                                            
                         Reduces exposure by 3 stops without affecting colour balance. Hard                  
                         transition from dark to light.                                                      
                         The Big Stopper for Seven5                                                          
                         A glass filter that reduces exposure by approximately 10 stops                      
                         Whether you need to balance the exposure between sky and                            
                         foreground, eliminate distracting reflections from water or extend your             
                         exposure to convey a sense of peace and stillness, this extensive kit has           
                         got it covered.                                                                     
                         TECHINAL SPESIFICATION                                                              
                         MINIMUM : "0.3 Neutral Density Hard Grad                                            
                         Reduces exposure by 1 stop without affecting colour balance. Hard                   
                         transition from dark to light.                                                      
                         0.9 Neutral Density Hard Grad                                                       
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         Seven5 Filter Holder                                                                
                         Seven5 Polariser                                                                    
                         0.6 ND Grad Soft 75mm                                                               
                         0.6 ND Grad Hard 75mm                                                               
                         0.9 ND Grad Hard 75mm                                                               
                         Big Stopper 75mm                                                                    
                                                                                               Page 35 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐057 RIG SET Follow Focus                                                                              
                         FEATURES                                                                            
                         Portable, compact.                                                                  
                         Precise follow focus and zoom control and comfortable dampening                     
                         feel.                                                                               
                         Ergonomic design, with independent modules.                                         
                         The installation angle can be adjusted to meet the needs of handheld                
                         and tripod shooting scenes.                                                         
                         Adjustable AB marks for easy switch between AB focal length and full                
                         focal length.                                                                       
                         Multiple interchangeable gears (standard 0.8 MOD), compatible with                  
                         various lens sizes                                                                  
                         Anti‐slip and anti‐sweat focus knob (imitating sports car hub).                     
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         REQUIRED                                                                            
                         1: Standard Φ15mm rod                                                               
                         2: NATO rail accessories                                                            
                         3: Standard 0.8 MOD lens and focus gear rings and replaceable M0.8‐                 
                         65T/43T/ 38T gears                                                                  
                         Φ62.5‐Φ64.5 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3291;                                          
                         Φ66‐Φ68 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3292;                                              
                         Φ72‐Φ74 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3293;                                              
                         Φ75‐Φ77 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3294;                                              
                         Φ78‐Φ80 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3295;                                              
                         Φ81‐Φ83 Seamless Focus Gear Ring 3296;                                              
                         4: Tie‐style focus gear ring supports lens diameter up to Φ114mm                    
                         5: Standard joystick and focus whip                                                 
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         1 x Mini Follow Focus                                                               
                         1 x M0.8‐43T Gear                                                                   
                         1 x Φ15mm Rod                                                                       
                         1 x Rod Clamp (with NATO rail)                                                      
                         1 x Tie‐style Focus Gear Ring                                                       
                         1 x Screwdriver                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 36 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐058 KAMERA FX RIG SET 06 Dual FEATURES                                                                
                         Designed for easy installation of large batteries on the camera                     
                         Equipped with adjustable hinges for easy access to the battery Made of              
                         lightweight and durable alloyed aluminum Can be mounted on a rigging                
                         system with 15mm rods                                                               
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION                                                             
                         Material: Aluminum Alloy                                                            
                         Rod Battery Hinge:min.15 mm                                                         
                         Dimensions: approx. 86 x 81.5 x 32mm                                                
                                                                                                             
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         2 x 1/4"‐20 Screws                                                                  
                         1 x 3/8"‐16 Screws                                                                  
                         1 x Allen Lock                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐059 RIG SET V Mount Battery FEATURES                                                                  
         Plate           1. The plate utilizing a standard V mount fits most V mount batteries to            
                         provide greater battery life for your camera rig with your battery's                
                         power port(s).                                                                      
                         2. It features multiple 1/4‐20"" countersinks, 1/4‐20"" thread holes,               
                         and M4 thread holes to attach a dual rod clamp, a magic arm, or other               
                         accessories.                                                                        
                         3. A lightweight and portable design (63g only) helps minimize your                 
                         camera setup's weight as much as possible.                                          
                         utilizing a standard V mount fits most V mount batteries to provide                 
                         greater battery life for your camera rig with your battery's power                  
                         port(s).                                                                            
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Product Dimensions: approx. 72 x 59.8 x 19.6mm                                      
                         Material(s): Aluminum Alloy                                                         
                         Minimum For Brands:Universal                                                        
                         Minimum For Models:Universal                                                        
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING:                                                                   
                                                                                               Page 37 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         1 x Mini V Mount Battery Plate                                                      
                         1 x Allen Wrench                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐060 Rechargeable Battery                                                                              
                         FEATURES                                                                            
                         High‐capacity rechargeable lithium‐ion battery                                      
                         Provides long battery life for extended shooting sessions                           
                         Quick charging with compatible chargers                                             
                         Compatible with select mirrorless cameras                                           
                         Sony InfoLITHIUM technology displays remaining battery life on camera               
                         LCD screen                                                                          
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Battery Type: Rechargeable lithium‐ion battery                                      
                         MINIMUM Battery Capacity: 2280mAh                                                   
                         Output Voltage: DC 7.2V (maximum); DC 7.2V (mean)                                   
                         Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 38.7 x 22.7 x 51.7 mm (1 9/16 x 29/32               
                         x 2 1/16 in)                                                                        
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐061 Recording Monitor FEATURES                                                                        
                         Equipped with a 5‐inch display that supports 4K resolution Can record               
                         4K video at up to 60 fps via HDMI connection Equipped with AtomHDR                  
                         technology to display more detail in light and dark areas Equipped with             
                         a 2.5" SSD card slot to record video directly Can send video and audio              
                         signals over HDMI or SDI connections Can monitor colors with a wide                 
                         variety of camera profiles and built‐in LUTs Can be used as an outside              
                         monitor for the camera by displaying a live view of the camera sensor.              
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICIFICATION                                                         
                         Screen: 5 inch IPS LCD                                                              
                         Resolution: mijn. 1920 x 1080                                                       
                         Connectivity: HDMI 2.0 in/out, 2x 12G‐SDI                                           
                                                                                               Page 38 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         in/out, audio in/out, headphone out, remote control via HDMI, USB                   
                         Type‐C Maximum Recording Resolution: min. 4Kp60 10‐bit HDR                          
                         Card Slot: 1x SSD 2.5"                                                              
                         Dimensions: approx 151 x 91.5 x 31mm                                                
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         1 x Unit , 1 x Master Caddy II                                                      
                         1 x Power Supply, 1 x Battery Eliminator 1 x                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐062 LENSA 24‐70mm f/2.8 FEATURES                                                                      
                         Equipped with a wide zoom range of 24‐70mm, suitable for various                    
                         types of shooting The maximum aperture of f/2.8 makes this lens                     
                         suitable for low light conditions and produces a beautiful bokeh effect             
                         Made of high‐quality materials that are durable and lightweight                     
                         Equipped with Nano AR Coating technology to reduce flare and                        
                         ghosting Equipped with a fast focusing system, accurate, and                        
                         responsive Comes with 9 diaphragm blades for beautiful and soft                     
                         bokeh results                                                                       
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION                                                             
                         Focusing Distance: Approx 24mm‐ 70mm                                                
                         Maximum Aperture: f/2.8                                                             
                         Minimum Aperture: f/22                                                              
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: 9                                                         
                         Minimum Focusing Distance: 38 cm                                                    
                         Lens Construction: 18 elements in 13                                                
                         filter groups Diameter: 82 mm                                                       
                         Dimensions: 87.6 x 136 mm                                                           
                         E‐mount                                                                             
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Lens hood                                                                       
                         1 x Lens bag                                                                        
                         1 x Front and rear lens cover                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 39 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐063 LENSA 16‐35mm f/2.8 FEATURES                                                                      
                         Equipped with a wide‐angle zoom range from 16‐35mm, suitable for                    
                         shooting landscape, architecture, and more The maximum aperture of                  
                         f/2.8 makes this lens suitable for low light conditions and produces a              
                         beautiful bokeh effect Made of durable and lightweight high‐quality                 
                         materials Equipped with Nano AR Coating technology to reduce flare                  
                         and ghosting Equipped with a fast focusing system, accurate, and                    
                         responsive Comes with 11 diaphragm blades for beautiful, soft bokeh                 
                         results                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Lens Type: Zoom Approx Focusing                                                     
                         Distance: approx. 16mm ‐ 35mm                                                       
                         Maximum Aperture: approx. f/2.8                                                     
                         Minimum Aperture: f/22                                                              
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: min.11 bars                                               
                         Focusing Distance: Minimum 28 cm                                                    
                         Lens Construction: 16 elements in 13 filter groups                                  
                         Diameter: approx. 82 mm                                                             
                         Dimensions: approx. 88.5 x 121.6 mm                                                 
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         all standart acessories                                                             
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Lens hood                                                                       
                         1 x Lens bag                                                                        
                         1 x Front and rear lens cover                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐064 LENSA FE 200‐600mm f/5.6‐ FEATURES                                                                
         6.3 G OSS       Equipped with a wide zoom range from 200‐600mm, suitable for                        
                         wildlife, sports and other photography The maximum aperture of f/5.6‐               
                         6.3 makes this lens suitable for difficult light conditions Equipped with           
                         Optical SteadyShot technology to reduce shock in images Equipped                    
                         with AR Nanocoating technology to reduce flare and ghosting Equipped                
                         with a fast and accurate focusing system Equipped with 11 diaphragm                 
                         blades for beautiful bokeh results and soft                                         
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Lens Type: Zoom                                                                     
                         Minimum Focusing Distance: min. 200mm                                               
                                                                                               Page 40 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Maximum Focusing Distance: min. 600mm                                               
                         Maximum Aperture: min. f/5.6‐6.3                                                    
                         Minimum Aperture: min. f/32‐36                                                      
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: min. 11 bars                                              
                         Minimum Focusing Distance: min. 240 cm                                              
                         Lens Construction: 24 elements in 17 filter groups                                  
                         Diameter: approx 95 mm                                                              
                         Dimensions: approx. 111.5 x 318 mm                                                  
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         1 x Unit , 1 x Lens hood, 1 x Lens bag, 1 x Front and rear lens cover               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐065 LENSA 70‐200mm f/2.8 OSS Features:                                                                
                         Equipped with a wide‐angle zoom range of 16‐35mm, suitable for                      
                         shooting landscapes, architecture, and more The maximum aperture of                 
                         f/2.8 makes this lens suitable for low‐light conditions and produces a              
                         beautiful bokeh effect Made of high‐quality materials that are durable              
                         and lightweight Equipped with Nano AR Coating technology to reduce                  
                         flare and ghosting Equipped with a fast focusing system, accurate, and              
                         responsive Comes with 11 diaphragm bars for beautiful and soft bokeh                
                         results                                                                             
                         TECHICAL SPESIFICATION                                                              
                         Lens Type: Zoom                                                                     
                         Minimum Focusing Distance:min. 200mm                                                
                         Maximum Focusing Distance:min. 600mm                                                
                         Aperture: max. f/5.6‐6.3                                                            
                          Aperture: Min. f/32‐36                                                             
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: min. 11 Bars                                              
                         Focusing Distance: min. 240 cm                                                      
                         Lens Construction: approx 24 elements in 17 filter groups                           
                         Diameter: approx 95 mm                                                              
                         Dimensions: approx. 111.5 x 318 mm                                                  
                         Supply Include:                                                                     
                         Alla standart acessories                                                            
                         Hood (model): ALC‐SH167 Front lens                                                  
                         cover:ALC‐F77S Lens rear                                                            
                         cover:ALC‐R1EM                                                                      
                         Tripod mount Protector                                                              
                                                                                               Page 41 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐066 LENSA 2X Teleconverter FEATURES                                                                   
                         Doubles the focusing distance on compatible lenses, resulting in                    
                         greater image magnification Made of durable and lightweight high‐                   
                         quality materials Designed with weather‐sealing features that make it               
                         resistant to adverse weather conditions Equipped with electronic                    
                         connectors that make it easy to install and control Compatible with                 
                         Sony camera lenses with mount E and FE                                              
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION                                                             
                         Lens Full Frame : min. 35mm                                                         
                         DIMENSIONS (T X P): Approx 62.4 x 42.7 mm                                           
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         1 x Unit, 1 x Front and rear lens cover                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐067 LENSA FE 100mm f/2.8 STF Features:                                                                
         GM OSS          Equipped with STF (Smooth Trans Focus) function that produces very                  
                         smooth and soft bokeh Made of high‐quality material that is durable                 
                         and lightweight Designed with Optical SteadyShot (OSS) technology                   
                         that helps reduce vibration effects on images Designed with                         
                         apodization technology that helps reduce diffraction and provide sharp              
                         and clear images Designed with a fast focus system, accurate, and                   
                         responsive Equipped with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 suitable for low               
                         light conditions and produces a beautiful bokeh effect                              
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Lens Type: Telephoto prime                                                          
                         Focusing Distance: approx. 100mm                                                    
                         Maximum Aperture: f/2.8                                                             
                         Minimum Aperture: f/20                                                              
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: min. 11 Minimum                                           
                         Focusing Distance:approx. 57 cm                                                     
                         Lens Construction: 13 elements in 10 groups                                         
                         Diameter Filters: min. 72 mm                                                        
                         Dimensions: approx. 78 x 118.1 mm                                                   
                                                                                               Page 42 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         1 xUnit                                                                             
                         1 x Lens hood                                                                       
                         1 x Lens bag                                                                        
                         1 x Front and rear lens cover                                                       
                         1 x Warranty Card                                                                   
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐068 LENSA 24mm f/14 2x Macro FEATURES                                                                 
         Probe Lens Cine Probe design that allows shooting from angles and depths that                       
                         standard lenses cannot achieve Equipped with an f/14 fixed aperture                 
                         and 2:1 focal range that enables macro shooting with deep depth                     
                         Made of durable and lightweight high‐quality materials Designed with a              
                         multicoating‐coated lens that helps reduce flare and ghosting during                
                         shooting Designed with a de‐clicked aperture feature that allows fine               
                         exposure adjustment during video capture Works can be used .                        
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Lens Type: Macro                                                                    
                         Probe Focusing Distance: approx. 24mm                                               
                         Maximum Aperture: f/14                                                              
                         Minimum Aperture: f/40                                                              
                         Number of Diaphragm Bars: min. 7                                                    
                         Minimum Focusing Distance: approx. 47mm                                             
                         Lens Construction: 27 elements in 19 filter groups                                  
                         Dimensions: approx 38 x 408mm                                                       
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         1 x Laowa 24mm f/14                                                                 
                         2x Macro Probe Lens Cine‐Sony FE                                                    
                         1 x Hood lens                                                                       
                         1 x Lens bag                                                                        
                         1 x Front lens cover and behind                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐069 Gimbal Stabilizer Features: Can be used to support various types of cameras weighing up           
                         to 4.5kg Equipped with 3‐axis stabilization technology that can smooth              
                                                                                               Page 43 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         the movement of the camera when in use Equipped with a remote                       
                         control with a wireless connection that facilitates remote camera setup             
                         Designed with changeable operating modes, including underslung                      
                         mode and briefcase mode Equipped with a standard camera mount                       
                         that can be used to connect the camera to the gimbal Stabilizer Can be              
                         used with DJI Intelligent Battery battery that can last up to 3 hours of            
                         use Equipped with port expansion that allows users to connect                       
                         accessories such as monitors, video transmitters and more                           
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Dimensions: approx. 620 x 280 x 500mm Approx                                        
                         Mechanical Control: Pitch: ‐135° to 180°, Roll: ‐30° to 90°, Pan: ±360°             
                         Apprx Electronic Control: Pitch: ‐180° to 180°, Roll: ‐90° to 30°,                  
                         Pan: ±360°                                                                          
                         Minimum Battery: Battery4S 1580mAh                                                  
                         Minimum Operating Time: 3 hours (depending on conditions of use)                    
                         System Compatibility: Windows 7 or later, Mac OS X 10.9                             
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         All Standar Accessoriess                                                            
                         1 x Unit 1 x Remote Control 1 x Standard Camera Mount 1 x Handlebar                 
                         2 x Battery 1 x Charger Battery 1 x Two sets of Arms Mounting Screws 1              
                         x USB Cable 1 x Strap 1 x Hardcase 1 x ‐ opration and maintenence                   
                         books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if available)                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐070 Battery V Mount Battery FEATURES                                                                  
                         High capacity 10400mAh, Up to longer operating time. Four classes of                
                         power displays Made for dual current detection Has protection:                      
                         Overdischarge, Overcharge, short circuit protection TAP interface                   
                         charger and Chargeable battery life more than 500 times Applicable to               
                         all professional broadcasting camcorder cameras for Sony cameras                    
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION                                                             
                         MINIMUM "Battery Measured Capacity : 10400mAH                                       
                         Mark Capacity: 10400                                                                
                         Compatible Battery Model: V‐Mount Battery                                           
                         Battery Type: Li‐ion                                                                
                         battery Decode : Half‐Decoded                                                       
                         Cell Material: Lithium‐ion                                                          
                         Voltage: 14.8"                                                                      
                                                                                               Page 44 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         all standart acessories                                                             
                         1x Unit Carrying case                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐071 V‐Mount Battery Charger Features:                                                                 
                         V‐Mount compatibility for use with a wide range of cameras and                      
                         accessories                                                                         
                         Large 10400mAh capacity for extended use                                            
                         LED power indicator for easy monitoring of battery life                             
                         D‐Tap and USB ports for powering additional accessories                             
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         MINIMUM                                                                             
                         Capacity:min. 10400mAh                                                              
                         Voltage: 14.8V                                                                      
                         Output: DC 14.8V                                                                    
                         Operating Temperature: ‐20°C to +50°C                                               
                         Dimensions: approx. 140.5 x 99 x 46.5 mm                                            
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         V Mount Battery BP‐150WS 10400mAh                                                   
                         Battery Pouch                                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐072 Battery       Features:                                                                           
                         Equipped with lithium‐ion technology that can produce long battery life             
                         and stable performance Equipped with LED power indicators that make                 
                         it easy for users to know the remaining battery power level Sturdy and              
                         lightweight design making it easy to carry and use in different shooting            
                         situations                                                                          
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum Voltage: 14.4V                                                              
                         Capacity: max approx. 70‐72Wh                                                       
                         Operating Time: Approximately 4‐5 hours                                             
                         Dimensions: approx 41 x 82 x 70 mm                                                  
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         1x Unit                                                                             
                                                                                               Page 45 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐073 Battery Charger #1 Features:                                                                      
                          Equipped with an LED indicator that shows the state of charge of the               
                         battery, so that users can easily find out how long the battery should              
                         be recharged Equipped with a compact and easy‐to‐carry design,                      
                         making it suitable for use when traveling or shooting outdoors Has                  
                         battery safety protection, including temperature setting, incorrect                 
                         detection of battery accessories, and protection against short circuits,            
                         which can provide protection against batteries and devices.                         
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum Input: AC 100‐240V, 50/60Hz, 0.35‐0.18A                                     
                         Minimum Output DC: amx. 8.4V, 3.0A                                                  
                         Dimensions: Approx. 69.4 x 38.4 x 83.5 mm                                           
                         Weight: Approx. 140 grams                                                           
                         Supplied Inclidding:                                                                
                         1x Unit AC Power Cord                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐074 Battery Charger #2 FEATURES                                                                       
                         Equipped with an LED indicator that shows the state of charge of the                
                         battery, so that users can easily find out how long the battery should              
                         be recharged Equipped with a compact and easy‐to‐carry design,                      
                         making it suitable for use when traveling or shooting outdoors Has                  
                         battery safety protection, including temperature setting, detection of              
                         incorrect battery accessories, and protection against short circuits,               
                         which can provide protection against batteries and devices. Can be                  
                         used to recharge two batteries simultaneously                                       
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Minimum Input: AC 100‐240V, 50/60Hz, 1.7A                                           
                         Minimum Output: DC 16.8V, 3.7A                                                      
                         Dimensions: 153 x 102 x 227 mm                                                      
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         1 x Dual‐Bay Battery Charger                                                        
                                                                                               Page 46 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐075 Memory Card for                                                                                   
         professional Cinematography Features                                                                
         Camera          High read and write speeds, up to 800 MB/s for reads and 700 MB/s for               
                         writes, which can speed up the process of transferring data to and                  
                         from the memory card Equipped with a waterproof, dustproof, and                     
                         impact‐resistant design, making it suitable for use when traveling or               
                         shooting outdoors in difficult conditions Has a storage capacity of 80              
                         GB, which can store many high‐resolution photos and videos Supported                
                         by PCIe 3.0 and NVMe, Waterproof, Dustproof, and Impact Resistant                   
                         technology specifications, so that it can provide better and efficient              
                         performance on compatible devices Equipped with Error Correction                    
                         Code (ECC) features and data refreshing that can improve the reliability            
                         of data                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION                                                             
                         Capacity: min. 80 GB                                                                
                         Read Speed: Up to 800 MB/s                                                          
                         Write Speed: Up to 700 MB/s                                                         
                         Interface: PCIe 3.0/NVMe                                                            
                         Power Consumption: 2.9W                                                             
                         Dimension:approx. 29.6 x 38.5 x 3.8 mm                                              
                         Weight: Approx. 10 grams                                                            
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         storage.                                                                            
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐076 Memory Card   Features:                                                                           
                         High read and write speed, up to 170 MB/s for read and 90 MB/s for                  
                         write, which can speed up the process of data transfer to and from the              
                         memory card Equipped with waterproof, dustproof, temperature‐                       
                         proof, shockproof, and X‐ray resistant design, so it can be used in                 
                         various difficult environmental conditions Equipped with a storage                  
                         capacity of 128GB, that can store many high‐resolution photos and                   
                         videos Supported by security technology that can protect data stored                
                         on memory cards Compatible with cameras that support the SDXC                       
                         format, Waterproof, dustproof, Temperature resistant, shockproof,                   
                                                                                               Page 47 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         and X‐ray resistant                                                                 
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Capacity: 128GB Minimum                                                             
                         Read Speed: Up to 170 MB/s Minimum                                                  
                         Write Speed : Up to 90 MB/s                                                         
                         Class: 10, UHS‐I (U3), V30                                                          
                         Size: 24 x 32 x 2.1 mm                                                              
                         Weight: Approx. 2 grams                                                             
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         Unit Only                                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐077 Memory Card Reader Features:                                                                      
                         Equipped with a USB 3.1 Gen 1 port that can provide data transfer                   
                         speeds of up to 5Gb/s Compatible with various types of memory cards,                
                         such as SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC, microSDXC, and CF Can                   
                         support memory cards with a capacity of up to 2TB Equipped with a                   
                         compact and portable design that is easy to carry around Equipped                   
                         with an indicator light to show data transfer status Equipped with                  
                         RecoveRx software that can help Technical users                                     
                         Specifications:                                                                     
                         Interface: USB 3.1 Gen 1                                                            
                         Dimensions: approx. 67.6mm x 45mm x 15.2mm                                          
                         Weight: 32 grams                                                                    
                         Memory Card Support: SD, SDHC, SDXC, microSD, microSDHC,                            
                         microSDXC, CF Supported Operating Systems: Windows 7/8/10, Mac                      
                         OS X 10.2.8 or later, Linux Kernel 2.6.30 or later                                  
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x USB                                                                             
                         Cable                                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐078 Tripod Cinematography FEATURES                                                                    
         Camera          compatible with sliding quick release plate, making it easy to set                  
                                                                                               Page 48 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         balance points for your equipment, Head has 7‐step (1 to 7 plus 0)                  
                         counterbalance system for your setup and independent 4‐step (1 to 3                 
                         plus 0) pan and tilt drag settings for precise control over camera                  
                         movement.                                                                           
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Video Tripod Support : min. 8.8 pounds                                              
                         ball fitting for stability : min.75mm                                               
                         7 step counter balance system                                                       
                         Price control Aluminum: approx ‐75 to 90 tilt range                                 
                         Bubble level Extender to full height                                                
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         Supplied Inlcludding:                                                               
                         Standar All Accessories                                                             
                         TRIPOD + BAG                                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐079 Electronic Humidity Control FEATURES                                                              
         Cabinet         Equipped with a humidity control system that can keep the humidity in               
                         the cabinet stable at 25‐60% RH (relative humidity) and avoid                       
                         condensation Equipped with a HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) air             
                         filter that can capture dust particles and microorganisms Equipped with             
                         a sturdy and durable design, made of high‐quality metal material                    
                         Equipped with temperature glass doors and easy‐to‐use touch screen                  
                         controls Equipped with door alarms, humidity alarms, and                            
                         temperature alarms that can help users monitor the condition of                     
                         cabinets in real‐time Equipped with LED lights that can provide                     
                         sufficient lighting inside the cabinets                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Minimum Dimensions in: 70cm x 45cm x 45cm                                           
                         Minimum Capacity: 200L                                                              
                         Humidity Control System: Electronic dehumidifying                                   
                         module Approx Humidity Range: 25‐60%RH                                              
                         Operating Temperature: approx. 5°C ‐ 35°C                                           
                         Air Filter: HEPA Filter Alarm: Door alarm, humidity alarm,                          
                         temperature alarm.Alarm                                                             
                         Power: AC 100‐240V 50/60Hz                                                          
                         Power Consumption: max. 70W                                                         
                                                                                               Page 49 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         Supply Include:                                                                     
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Power cord                                                                      
                         3 x Storage rack                                                                    
                         1 x Key part                                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐080 Professional Cinematography FEATURES                                                              
         Lighting #1     Equipped with a 600W LED light source with a fixed color temperature                
                         of 5600K (Daylight) Equipped with a special LED driver that can provide             
                         high light stability with CRI and TLCI ≥96 and SSI (Spectral Similarity             
                         Index) ≥72 Equipped with DMX512 control and 2.4GHz wireless control,                
                         which allows users to control the light remotely Equipped with                      
                         adjustable lens focus, which allows users to adjust the light pattern               
                         from 15 degrees to 55 degrees Equipped with a sturdy and durable                    
                         design, made of high‐quality aluminum material Equipped with                        
                         ventilation and temperature‐controlled fans to maintain temperature                 
                         stability when used for a long time Equipped with creative light effect             
                         settings, such as strobe, lightning, and effect mode                                
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Power Output: Min. 600W                                                             
                         Color Temperature: 5600K (Daylight)                                                 
                         CRI: ≥96 TLCI: ≥96                                                                  
                         SSI (Spectral Similarity Index): ≥72                                                
                         Light Intensity: 4.680lux@2m (15°)                                                  
                         Power Input: AC 100‐240V                                                            
                         Power Consumption: max. 720W                                                        
                         Approx Focus Lens: 15‐55 degrees                                                    
                         Minimum Control: DMX512, 2.4GHz                                                     
                         wireless Light Effect: Strobe, Lightning, Fan Effect                                
                         Mode: Temperature controlled                                                        
                         Dimensions: approx. 388 x 343 x 186mm                                               
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         All Standart accessories                                                            
                         1x Unit Control Box Hyper Reflector NP‐F Battery Plate Adapter                      
                         Weatherproof Head Cable Neutrik AC Cable VA Remote RC1+ Lightning                   
                         Clamp Rolling Carry Case Limited                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 50 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐081 Professional Cinematography FEATURES                                                              
         Lighting #2     Equipped with high‐quality diffuser material, which can produce soft                
                         and even lighting Equipped with a special reflector material that can               
                         improve lighting efficiency and produce greater light output Equipped               
                         with a design that is easy to install and operate, and easy to store and            
                         transport Equipped with universal compatibility with various types of               
                         LED lights commonly used in the film and photography industry                       
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Output Power: max. 350W                                                             
                         Color Temperature:approx 5500K (Daylight)                                           
                         CRI: approx. ≥96                                                                    
                         TLCI: approx ≥96                                                                    
                         Minimum Light Intensity: 80,000 lux @ 1m (10°),                                     
                         7,200 lux @ 1m (45°)                                                                
                         Power Input: AC 100‐240V, 50/60Hz                                                   
                         Power Consumption: max. 350W                                                        
                         Approx Lens Focus: 10‐45 degrees                                                    
                         Control: DMX 512, 2.4GHz                                                            
                         wireless Light Effect: Strobe, Lightning, Fan                                       
                         Effect Mode: Temperature controlled                                                 
                         Dimensions: approx. 344 x 302 x 194mm                                               
                         Supplied Includding                                                                 
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Control Box                                                                     
                         1 x Cable power                                                                     
                         1 x Bracket mounting                                                                
                         1 x Remote control                                                                  
                         1 x Reflector mounting,                                                             
                         1x Carriying bag,                                                                   
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐082 Lighting Shaping Tool soft box FEATURES                                                           
                         Equipped with high‐quality diffuser material, which can produce soft                
                         and even lighting Equipped with a special reflector material that can               
                         improve lighting efficiency and produce greater light output Equipped               
                         with a design that is easy to install and operate, and easy to store and            
                         transport Equipped with universal compatibility with various types of               
                                                                                               Page 51 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         LED lights commonly used in the film and photography industry                       
                                                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Diameter: approx. 89cm                                                              
                         Depth: approx. 64cm                                                                 
                         Material: Nylon and Construction Diffuser                                           
                         Material: Three‐bolt head                                                           
                         Compatibility: Almost all types of LED lights commonly used in film and             
                         photography industry                                                                
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Carrying Bag                                                                    
                         1 x Diffuser Cloth                                                                  
                         1 x Grid                                                                            
                         1 x Adapter ring                                                                    
                         1 x Deflector Plate                                                                 
                         1 x Bracket mounting                                                                
                         1 x User Manual                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐083 Lighting Shaping Tool Lantern FEATURES                                                            
                         Equipped with high‐quality diffuser material, which can produce soft                
                         and even lighting Equipped with a ball design that can be easily                    
                         installed in LED lights commonly used in the film and photography                   
                         industry Equipped with a folding system that can facilitate storage and             
                         transportation Equipped with the ability to direct light on the subject             
                         more accurately Equipped with the standard use of Bowens S Mount,                   
                         so it can be used with various types of LED lamps commonly used in the              
                         film and photography industry                                                       
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Diameter: approx. 89cm                                                              
                         Depth: approx. 64cm                                                                 
                         Material: Nylon and Construction Diffuser                                           
                         Material: Ball                                                                      
                         Compatibility: Almost all types of LED lights commonly used in film and             
                         photography industry                                                                
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                                                                                               Page 52 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         1 x Control Box                                                                     
                         1 x Cable power                                                                     
                         1 x Bracket mounting                                                                
                         1 x Remote control                                                                  
                         1 x Reflector mounting,                                                             
                         1x Carriying bag,                                                                   
                         1x manual Bookl                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐084 Lighting Smoothing Tool FEATURES                                                                  
                         Equipped with optical glass lens technology, which can produce more                 
                         focused and stronger lighting Equipped with a lightweight and portable              
                         design, so it is easy to carry around and install on LS 600d LED lights             
                         Equipped with the ability to extend the focusing distance by up to 10               
                         times, which is very useful for film and video production purposes                  
                         Equipped with a cooling system that can prevent overheating of LED                  
                         lights when used in time the old                                                    
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Length: min. 210mm                                                                  
                         Diameter: min. 133mm                                                                
                         Material: Aluminum and Glass                                                        
                          Minimum Color Temperature: 5600K                                                   
                         Maximum Diffused Power: 12°                                                         
                         Maximum Focused Power: 42° Masimum                                                  
                         Noise: 18dB                                                                         
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Carrying Bag                                                                    
                         1 x User manual                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐085 Light modifiers FEATURES                                                                          
                         Equipped with four tile door panels that can be rotated and arranged                
                         to form the desired lighting angle The tile door panels are made of                 
                         durable metal and can be used to adjust the lighting with more                      
                         precision Equipped with an easy‐to‐use snap‐on system and arranged                  
                         according to needs Designed with the appropriate shape and size for                 
                                                                                               Page 53 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         use with Aputure F10 Fresnel                                                        
                                                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Material: Metal                                                                     
                         Dimensions: approx. 17.8 x 15.2 x 1.3cm Attachment                                  
                                                                                                             
                         SUUPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         1 x Unit                                                                            
                         1 x Storage Bag                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐086 Light Color RGB Extensive RGB features and diverse creative effects Equipped with                 
                         mounting accessories such as cold shoe mounts, mounting brackets,                   
                         and gel holders for easy installation on a tripod or other device                   
                         Wireless charger that can charge up to 4 units of Aputure MC RGB                    
                         lights simultaneously Equipped                                                      
                         with easy‐to‐use control buttons to adjust the desired colors and                   
                         effects                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         RGB MC Lights: 4 x 95 lux at 0.3 meters,                                            
                         CRI/TLCI: approx. 96/97                                                             
                         Wireless Charger: Input 100‐240 VAC, 50/60 Hz; Output: 5 VDC, 2 A                   
                         Light Dimensions: approx 93 x 61 x 17mm                                             
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         4 x Unit (1Package)                                                                 
                         4 x Cold Shoe Mounts                                                                
                         4 x Mounting Brackets                                                               
                         4 x Gel Holders                                                                     
                         1 x Wireless Charger                                                                
                         1 x USB Type‐C Cable                                                                
                         1 x Storage Bag                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐087 C‐Stand                                                                                           
                         FEATURES                                                                            
                                                                                               Page 54 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         – Quick Release Turtle Base Design                                                  
                         – Easy to setup and disassemble                                                     
                         – Grip Head with Auto Lock                                                          
                         – Spigot with 1/4” screw on two sides                                               
                         – Twist Lock on each section with Spring Cushion                                    
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         C‐Stand ALLOWS MOUNTING OF HEAVY EQUIPMENT                                          
                         Max Height 320cm                                                                    
                         Folded Height 150cm                                                                 
                         Max Load 10kg                                                                       
                         Pipe Size 35, 30, 25cm                                                              
                         Material Stainless Steel Spring Cushion                                             
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         Unit                                                                                
                         Grip head                                                                           
                         Grip arm                                                                            
                         Turtle base‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa                    
                         indonesia ( if available)                                                           
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         "                                                                                   
 L02‐2‐088 Vest/Arm Support for FEATURES                                                                     
         Stabilizer Gimbals Vest will allow you to walk, run, go up and down stairs, shoot from              
                         moving vehicles and travel over uneven terrain without any camera                   
                         instability or shake.                                                               
                         Support Arm Movement                                                                
                         The GLIDECAM X‐10'S support arm can be boomed up and down, as                       
                         well as pivoted in and out, and side‐to‐side. It is the combined booming            
                         and pivoting action of the support arm that isolates your motions from              
                         the camera in a way that creates smooth camera footage. Lightweight,                
                         comfortable and can be adjusted to fit a wide range of operators.                   
                         High endurance, dual density, EVA foam padding and integral T6                      
                         aluminum alloy create a vest which can hold and evenly distribute the               
                         weight of the system across the operator's shoulders, back, and hips                
                         .                                                                                   
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         REQUIRED                                                                            
                         Dual Support Arm                                                                    
                                                                                               Page 55 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         5.75 lbs                                                                            
                         Max 2.6 kg                                                                          
                         Individual Weight Plates                                                            
                         12.9 oz                                                                             
                         366 g                                                                               
                         FEATURES                                                                            
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         VEST 1X                                                                             
                         VEST FOR STABILIZE 1X                                                               
                         ARM 1X                                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐089 Glidecam Stabilizer System FEATURES                                                               
                         ) Equipped with gears for finer adjustment Equipped with a quick and                
                         easy system of plates for quick and easy camera installation and                    
                         removal Equipped with a load balancer for easier camera setup Made                  
                         of aluminum material with high quality so that it is durable and                    
                         lightweight Equipped with ergonomic handles that are comfortable to                 
                         use                                                                                 
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Construction: Aluminum                                                              
                         Load Capacity approx 1.8‐4.5kg                                                      
                         Vest Optional Body‐Pod Arm Optional Forearm Support Brace Head                      
                         Assembly/Top Stage Adjustable X,Y Head                                              
                         Dimensions: approx 8,750 x 5.00 x 1.00""                                            
                         Quick Release Yes and Camera                                                        
                         Plate has 1/4‐20 and 3/8"" Mounting Dovetail                                        
                         Plate Base Platform 13.75 x 4.75""‐18.25 x 4.75""                                   
                         Gimbal Free floating,                                                               
                         precision Gimbal Dynamic Spin 360‐degree                                            
                         panning and tilting Post Telescoping                                                
                         Central Support Post: 1.00""                                                        
                         diameter 20 to 28""                                                                 
                         Supply :                                                                            
                         All Necessary Accessories                                                           
                         Fast Plate System Unit                                                              
                         Load Balancer‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa                  
                         indonesia ( if available)                                                           
                                                                                               Page 56 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐090 Waterproof Hard Case FEATURES                                                                     
         Camera          high quality so that it is durable and lightweight Equipped with a TSA‐             
                         approved double‐lock system for maximum safety Equipped with                        
                         adjustable protective foam to keep cameras, lenses and accessories                  
                         safe and organized Equipped with strong and waterproof straps                       
                         Equipped with comfortable and durable fulcrum handles                               
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Materials: ABS Minimum Internal                                                     
                         Dimensions: approx32 x 22 x 39.5 cm                                                 
                         Minimum External Dimensions: approx 36 x 29.5 x 47 cm                               
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         TSA‐approved Adjustable protective foam Strong and waterproof                       
                         Straps Comfortable fulcrum                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐091 Hard Case Camera FEATURES                                                                         
                         Made of durable and lightweight polycarbonate and ABS materials                     
                         Equipped with a TSA‐approved double‐lock system for maximum safety                  
                         Equipped with adjustable protective foam to keep cameras, lenses and                
                         accessories safe and organized Equipped with strong, waterproof                     
                         straps Equipped with comfortable and durable fulcrum handles                        
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Materials: Polycarbonate and ABS Internal                                           
                         Dimensions: Approx. (25.2 x 18.6 x 13.8 cm                                          
                         External Dimensions: approx. 28.8 x 23.4 x 17 cm                                    
                         Supplied Includding                                                                 
                         owepro Hardside 200 Photo TSA‐approved Double lock system                           
                         Adjustable foam protector Strong and waterproof Strap Comfortable                   
                         fulcrum handle                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐092 Camcorder Camera Bag FEATURES                                                                     
         Cargo Case      Several compartments and pockets for organizing cameras, lenses,                    
                         accessories, and personal items. Made of durable and waterproof                     
                                                                                               Page 57 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Cordura nylon material with a rigid frame for maximum protection.                   
                         Removable foam divider to adjust the interior layout. Two side pockets              
                         for storing a tripod, light stand, or umbrella. Adjustable shoulder straps          
                         and padded handles to carry comfortably. Compatible with most DSLR                  
                         and mirrorless cameras, as well as professional camcorders.                         
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Outer dimensions: approx 55.88 x 33.02 x 33.02 cm)                                  
                         Interior dimensions: approx. 50.8 x 27.94 x 27.94 cm)                               
                         Material: Cordura nylon                                                             
                         Color: Black                                                                        
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING Porta Brace CAR‐2CAM Cargo Case Removable                          
                         foam divider Adjustable shoulder strap Padded handle                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐093 Color Checker FEATURES                                                                            
                         Equipped with 4 color measurement targets: Passport, Classic, White                 
                         Balance, and Creative Enhancement. Can generate camera profiles and                 
                         custom DNG profiles. MINIMUM Equipped with software to simplify                     
                         the color calibration process. Easy to carry and store in a camera bag or           
                         bag. Ideal for producing accurate and consistent colors in every photo.             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Dimensions: approx 125mm x 90mm x 9mm                                               
                         Operating Temperature Range: approx 0 ‐ 40 degrees Celsius                          
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         1x Unit Software for color calibration User manual Storage box                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐094 Cinematography Production                                                                         
         Slider          FEATURES                                                                            
                         Comes with a roller bearing system that makes slider movement                       
                         smoother. Made of strong and durable aluminum material. Equipped                    
                         with height‐adjustable legs. Easy to carry and install. Suitable for                
                         photography and videography purposes. T                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         "Roller Bearing Sliding System                                                      
                                                                                               Page 58 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         oad Capacity: min. 44 lb                                                            
                         Track Length : min. 23.6""                                                          
                         Tension‐Adjustable Ball Bearings Friction Adjustable Knob                           
                         Tie‐Down 3/8""‐16 Screw                                                             
                         Slider Length: 80cm or 100cm                                                        
                         Max Load: 40kg                                                                      
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         Konova K3 Slider Foot Support Storage box                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐095 DJ Ronin Rig  Features:                                                                           
                         Designed for DJI Ronin for increased comfort during use. Made of                    
                         sturdy and lightweight aluminum material. It can be mounted on the                  
                         right or left side of the gimbal. There are multiple mounting points for            
                         other accessories. Equipped with a grip that is comfortable when held.              
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Dimensions: approx. 172 x 120 x 55mm                                                
                         Material(s): Aluminum Alloy, Silicone                                               
                         Supplied Includes:                                                                  
                         1x Unit                                                                             
                         2x M4 Screw                                                                         
                         1x Hex Spanner                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐096 Cinematographic Drones FEATURES                                                                   
                         . Can fly for 31 minutes with a maximum range of up to 12 km and a                  
                         maximum speed of 68.4 km/h (under ideal conditions). Equipped with                  
                         OcuSync 3.0 technology that allows live streaming of video with a                   
                         transmission distance of up to 12 km (under ideal conditions). It is                
                         equipped with obstacle avoidance sensors in front, rear, and bottom,                
                         as well as ADS‐B sensors that can detect passing aircraft. Equipped with            
                         ActiveTrack 4.0, Spotlight 2.0, and Point of Interest 3.0 features that             
                         allow drones to follow objects, lock objects, and surround objects                  
                         easily. Equipped with a MasterShots feature that allows drones to                   
                         automatically record video with 10 different shooting scenarios.                    
                                                                                               Page 59 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Dimensions: approx. 180 x 97 x 84 mm                                                
                         (folded), approx. 183 x 253 x 77 mm                                                 
                         Max Speed:approx. 68.4 km/h (under ideal conditions)                                
                         Minimum Flying Time: 3approx.1 minutes (under ideal conditions)                     
                         Minimum Camera: min. 1 inch CMOS,                                                   
                         Video Resolution: min. 20 MP 5.4K/30fps, 4K/60fps                                   
                          Bitrate Max: approx. 150 Mbps                                                      
                         SUPPLY INCLUDING                                                                    
                         1x Unit                                                                             
                         1x Remote Controller                                                                
                         3x Intelligent Flight Battery                                                       
                         6x Pairs of Low‐Noise Propellers                                                    
                         1x Battery Charging Hub                                                             
                         1x Battery to Power Bank Adapter                                                    
                         1x ND Filters Set (ND4/8/16/32)                                                     
                         1x Shoulder Bag                                                                     
                         1x RC Cable (USB Type‐C)                                                            
                         1x RC Cable (Lightning)                                                             
                         1x RC Cable (Standard Micro‐USB)                                                    
                         1x Gimbal Protector                                                                 
                         1x Type‐C Cable                                                                     
                         1x Pair of Spare Control Sticks                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐097 Small Active Mobile Camera FEATURES                                                               
                         Built‐In Mounting with Folding Fingers, HERO10 Black Mods                           
                         Compatibility, HyperSmooth 4.0 Video Stabilization, TimeWarp 3.0                    
                         Video, SuperPhoto + HDR, Night Lapse Video, Digital Lenses                          
                         (SuperView, Wide, Linear + Horizon Leveling, Linear, Narrow), Live                  
                         Streaming in 1080p, Webcam Mode, Power Tools (HindSight, LiveBurst,                 
                         Scheduled Capture, Duration Capture), Voice Control, RAW in All Photo               
                         Modes, Presets + On‐Screen Shortcuts, Intuitive Touch Screen, Touch                 
                         Zoom, Portrait Orientation, Photo Timer, Rugged + Waterproof to 33ft                
                         (10m), 8x Slo‐Mo, 100Mbps Bit Rate, Face Smile Blink + Scene                        
                         Detection, Exposure Control, GP2 Chip, Protune, Rechargeable Battery                
                         (1720mAh Lithium‐Ion), Protective Housing (HERO10 Black) Compatible                 
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Minimum Sensor : 23MP 1/2.3‐inch                                                    
                                                                                               Page 60 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Minimu Layar : 2.27‐inch touchscreen LCD (rear) & 1.4‐inch LCD (front)              
                         Resolusi Video : 5.3K60, 4K120 + 2.7K240 Wide FOV Konektivitas : Wi‐Fi              
                         + Bluetooth®                                                                        
                         Memori : microSD card                                                               
                         Minimum Stabilisasi Video : HyperSmooth 4.0                                         
                         Minimum Slow Motion : 8x Slo‐Mo                                                     
                         Format File Video : MP4 (H.264/AVC), MP4 (H.265/HEVC) Penyimpanan                   
                         Konektor : USB‐C & microSD Slot                                                     
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         Box, Charger, Charger cable, Unit                                                   
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐098 Drawing tablet Display Pro Features: Equipped with a Wacom Pro Pen 2 pen stylus with 8,192        
                         pressure levels and 60‐degree inclination capability Equipped with 99%              
                         Adobe RGB color gamut and HDR technology to produce accurate and                    
                         vivid colors 4K Ultra HD (3840 x 2160) screen resolution with a screen              
                         size of 23.6 inches that provides a large workspace and sharp image                 
                         details Equipped with 10 hotkeys and 5 function keys that can be                    
                         adjusted to user preferences Equipped with with adjustable stand with               
                         tilt up to 20 degrees                                                               
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         Display Size: min. 24‐inch                                                          
                         Resolution: approx. 3840 x 2160                                                     
                         Aspect Ratio: 16:9                                                                  
                         Color Gamut: Adobe RGB: 99% (typical)                                               
                         Brightness: 250 cd/m² (typical)                                                     
                         Viewing Angle: 178°                                                                 
                         Active Area: approx. 518.4 x 324 mm                                                 
                         Response Time: min. 14 ms (typical)                                                 
                         Report Rate: min. 200 RPS Compatible                                                
                         Supply Included:                                                                    
                         Standar Acessories                                                                  
                         Pro Pen 2 with 10 spare pen tips HDMI cable and USB‐C Power adapter                 
                         and cable Cleaning cloth                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 61 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐099 Ergo Stand    Features:                                                                           
                         Ergonomic design: Adjust the height and tilt angle of your suit your                
                         preferences, and enjoy a comfortable, natural drawing experience.                   
                         Robust construction: The stand is made from high‐quality materials,                 
                         with a sturdy base and adjustable arms, to ensure stability and                     
                         durability.                                                                         
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Compatibility: DTK2420 and DTH2420 models                                           
                         Height adjustment:approx. 0 to 150 mm (0 to 5.9 in)                                 
                         Tilt angle: min. ‐5° to 20°                                                         
                         Dimensions : approx. 661 x 565 x 150 mm (26 x 22.2 x 5.9 in)                        
                         Supplied Included:                                                                  
                         AC power adapter                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐100 Drawing tablet Display Features                                                                   
         Medium          13.3‐inch Full HD display with anti‐glare film and 72% NTSC color gamut             
                         Battery‐free pen with 4096 levels of pressure sensitivity and tilt                  
                         recognition                                                                         
                         Compatible with Windows and Mac operating systems                                   
                         Adjustable stand with four different positions for comfortable drawing              
                         angles                                                                              
                         Comes with creative software (Corel Painter Essentials 7, Clip Studio               
                         Paint Pro, and more)                                                                
                         Technical spesification                                                             
                         MINIMUM                                                                             
                         Display Size:min. 13.3 inches                                                       
                         Resolution: Full HD approx. (1920 x 1080)                                           
                         Color Gamut: min. 72% NTSC                                                          
                         Pen Pressure Levels: approx. 4096                                                   
                         Tilt Recognition:approx. ±60 levels                                                 
                         Connectivity: HDMI and USB cables included                                          
                         Power Supply: USB‐C (single cable for power and data)                               
                         Suppply Including                                                                   
                         Wacom One Creative Pen Display                                                      
                         Adjustable stand                                                                    
                         Wacom One pen                                                                       
                         USB‐C cable                                                                         
                                                                                               Page 62 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         HDMI cable                                                                          
                         AC adapter                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐101 Drawing Tablet No Display Technical Spesification                                                 
                         Dimension :approx. 264 x 200 x 8,8 mm / 10,4 x 7,8 x 0,35 inci                      
                         Area active : approx. 216,0 x 135,0 mm (8,5 x 5,3 inci)                             
                         ExpressKeys™ : Yes ‐                                                                
                         4 adjustable                                                                        
                         Pressure level :min. 4096                                                           
                         Resolution :min. 2540 lpi                                                           
                         Pen : Pen 4K (LP‐1100K)                                                             
                         Features                                                                            
                         Control and precision thanks to the pen’s 4,096 levels of pressure                  
                         sensitivity.                                                                        
                         EMR (Electro‐Magnetic Resonance) technology means the battery–free                  
                         pen is light and comfortable to use.                                                
                         100 lines per mm recognition lets the tablet know exactly where your                
                         pen is.                                                                             
                         Just 8.8mm thin, the tablet is as slim and sleek as a smartphone.                   
                         2 pen buttons for quick access shortcuts.                                           
                         4 customisable ExpressKeys™ for faster, efficient shortcuts.                        
                         7‐inch active tablet area on small model. 10‐inch active area for                   
                         medium models.                                                                      
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE                                                                      
                         Pen tablet Medium without Bluetooth                                                 
                         Pressure‐sensitive, battery‐free Wacom Pen 4K                                       
                         PVC‐free USB cable with cable tidy and L‐shaped connector                           
                         3 extra standard nibs (located inside pen)                                          
                         Nib removal tool on end of pen                                                      
                         Quick start guide                                                                   
                         Regulation sheet                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐102 Microphone Clip‐On Features:                                                                      
                         Wireless control: Control your camera's focus remotely, without any                 
                         cables or wires, for greater freedom and versatility on set.                        
                         High‐speed operation: The MovieLink system operates quickly and                     
                                                                                               Page 63 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         smoothly, with minimal delay, to ensure accurate and reliable focus                 
                         control.                                                                            
                         Easy to use: The system is user‐friendly and straightforward, with clear,           
                         simple controls and a clear display.                                                
                         Versatile compatibility: The MovieLink system supports most cameras                 
                         with a standard lens mount, making it a versatile and cost‐effective                
                         solution for a wide range of applications.                                          
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum                                                                             
                         Wireless Frequency: 2.4 GHz                                                         
                         Minimum Operating Distance: Up to 100 m (328 ft)                                    
                         Minimum Battery Life: 8‐10 hours (depending on usage)                               
                         Compatibility: Supports most cameras with a standard lens mount                     
                         What's Included:                                                                    
                         Unit                                                                                
                         Transmitter unit                                                                    
                         Receiver unit                                                                       
                         Hand grip                                                                           
                         Lens gear ring                                                                      
                         USB cable                                                                           
                         User manual                                                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐103 Mic Wireless Broadcast Features:                                                                  
                         Wireless freedom: With a range of up to 100 meters (328 feet), you can              
                         move freely while you perform, speak, or present.                                   
                         Clip‐on design: The compact, lightweight ME2 microphone can be                      
                         attached to your clothing, providing easy and discreet access to your               
                         audio.                                                                              
                         Compatible with Sennheiser G4 systems: The EW 100 G4‐ME2                            
                         microphone is part of Sennheiser's G4 wireless system, which offers                 
                         reliable, versatile, and user‐friendly solutions for a wide range of                
                         applications.                                                                       
                         Easy‐to‐use: The microphone is easy to set up and use, with intuitive               
                         controls and a clear audio signal.                                                  
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum                                                                             
                         minimum Frequency Range: A1: 516‐558 MHz, A: 566‐608 MHz, G:                        
                         558‐602 MHz, B: 626‐668 MHz                                                         
                                                                                               Page 64 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         RF Output Power: 30 mW                                                              
                         Audio Frequency Response: 20 ‐ 18,000 Hz                                            
                         Maksimum Signal‐to‐Noise Ratio: 110 dB                                              
                         Audio Input Connector: Mini jack (3.5 mm)                                           
                         Minimum Operating Time: 8 hours (with AA batteries)                                 
                         Supplied Included:                                                                  
                         True diversity receiver Unit                                                        
                         Bodypack transmitter Unit                                                           
                         Mekanisme clip‐on microphone                                                        
                         2x batere AA                                                                        
                         Antena                                                                              
                         cable audio 3,5 mm                                                                  
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐104 THEATER PROJECTOR 4K Features:                                                                    
                         4K Ultra HD resolution (3840 x 2160) for clear and sharp image display              
                         CinematicColor™ technology to produce accurate and vivid colors, high               
                         contrast 60Hz refresh rate and support for 3D for a more vivid cinema               
                         experience 1.6x zoom lens and vertical/horizontal lens shift for easy               
                         projector position adjustment                                                       
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum Technology Projection: DLP Minimum Physical                                 
                         Resolution: 3840 x 2160 (4K)                                                        
                         Minimum Brightness: 1800 ANSI Lumens                                                
                         Minimum Contrast Ratio: 100,000:1 Lens: F1.812.42, f= 1215.6                        
                         Maximum Zoom Ratio: 1.6X                                                            
                         Aspect Ratio: Native 16:9 (Minimum 5 selectable aspect ratio)                       
                         Minimum Lamp Life: Normal 4,000 hours;                                              
                         Economic 10,000 hours                                                               
                         Input Port:                                                                         
                         2 x HDMI (HDMI 2.0b/HDCP 2.2),                                                      
                         1 x USB Type‐A (for USB Reader),                                                    
                         1 x USB Type miniB (for service)                                                    
                         Output Port: 1 x Audio out (3.5mm Mini Jack)                                        
                         Audio Speaker: 5W x 2                                                               
                         Supply Including                                                                    
                         Projector BenQ W5700 Remote control and battery                                     
                         Power cable HDMI Cable                                                              
                         Mini USB Cable B                                                                    
                                                                                               Page 65 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐105 Studio Speaker 7.2 Screening Features:                                                            
                         Surround sound decoding: supports both Dolby Digital and DTS                        
                         decoding, allowing you to experience full 5.1 surround sound from your              
                         compatible discs and content.                                                       
                         Multiple audio inputs: The receiver features a range of audio inputs,               
                         including component video inputs, S‐Video inputs, and optical and                   
                         coaxial digital audio inputs, making it easy to connect a variety of                
                         sources.                                                                            
                         Easy to use: features a user‐friendly interface, with clearly labeled               
                         inputs and straightforward controls, making it easy to set up and use.              
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Power Output: min. 100 watts per channel (6 ohms, 1 kHz, THD 1.0 %,                 
                         1 channel driven)                                                                   
                         MINIMUM Surround Sound: Dolby Digital, DTS, Pro Logic II                            
                         MINIMUM Connectivity: 4 audio inputs, 2 audio outputs, 2 component                  
                         video inputs, 3 composite video inputs, 1 composite video output, 2 S‐              
                         Video inputs, 1 S‐Video output, 2 optical digital audio inputs, 1 coaxial           
                         digital audio input, and 1 headphone jack                                           
                         Tuner: AM/FM                                                                        
                         Power Consumption: max. 380W                                                        
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         Studio Speaker 7.2 Screening                                                        
                         Remote control (with batteries)                                                     
                         Power cord                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐106 Broadcast Camera FEATURES                                                                         
                         Can record 4K video with a frame rate of up to 60 fps Equipped with a               
                         1.0‐type sensor with a resolution of 14.2 megapixels Equipped with a                
                         29mm wide‐angle G lens and optical zoom up to 12x Equipped with                     
                         Clear Image Zoom technology that can expand optical zoom up to 18x                  
                         Equipped with a 5‐axis SteadyShot image stabilization system with                   
                         Intelligent Active mode Can record slow motion video up to 120 fps                  
                         (1080p) Equipped with a variable ND filter with Light reduction range               
                         from 1/4 to 1/128 Equipped with features Dual SD Card Slot and Relay                
                         Recording                                                                           
                                                                                               Page 66 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPEC.                                                                     
                         Minimum Sensor: 1.0‐                                                                
                         Minimum Video Resolution: 4K (3840 x 2160)                                          
                         Minimum Frame Rate: 24p, 30p, 60p                                                   
                         Minimum Bitrate Video: 100 Mbps                                                     
                         Lens: G lens, optical zoom 12x ND                                                   
                         filter: Variable ND (1/4 to 1/128)                                                  
                         Image Stabilisation: 5‐axis SteadyShot with Intelligent Active                      
                         Audio mode: Dolby Digital 2ch, LPCM 2ch                                             
                         Save Media: Memory Stick PRO Duo (Mark 2),                                          
                         Memory Stick PRO‐HG Duo,                                                            
                         Memory Stick XC‐HG Duo, SD/SDHC/SDXC (UHS‐I U3 or higher)                           
                         Connectivity: HDMI, USB, microphone input, headphone output                         
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         Battery Pack                                                                        
                         AC Adapter                                                                          
                         AC Cable Lens hood Handle Eye cup                                                   
                         Microphone holder USB Cable                                                         
                         HDMI Cable                                                                          
                         Remote control                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐107 Broadcast Tronic Ceiling Features                                                                 
         Lightiong       ceiling track systems designed for easy use of cameras or other video               
                         equipment in various production situations that is, tools used to                   
                         support cameras or other video equipment Can withstand loads up to                  
                         15 kg Easy to install and use Suitable for professional video production            
                         and photography studios                                                             
                         Tech Spec                                                                           
                         Track length: approx. 3 x 3 meters                                                  
                         Consists of:min. 5 track                                                            
                         xbars with a length of : approx.1.5 meters                                          
                         Equipped : min approx. 4 panthograp,                                                
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         All Standart Necessary Accesories                                                   
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 67 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐108 Tripod Roller Features                                                                            
                         Allows users to easily move heavy tripods and photographic equipment                
                         smoothly and stably Equipped with wheel brakes to prevent unwanted                  
                         movement when used on uneven or inclined surfaces Designed with                     
                         high‐quality materials for durability and long durability                           
                         Technical Spesification                                                             
                         Material: Aluminum                                                                  
                         Dimensions: Approx. 114.3 mm x 114.3 mm x 114.3 mm                                  
                         load capacity:approx. 68 kg                                                         
                         Wheel size:approx. 3 inch                                                           
                         Supply Include                                                                      
                         Tether Tools Rock Solid                                                             
                         Tripod Roller Brake Wheels                                                          
                         Carry‐on bag for transportation and storage                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐109 Tripod with Ball Head Features:                                                                   
                         Allows users to easily move heavy tripods and photographic                          
                         equipment smoothly and stably Equipped with wheel brakes to prevent                 
                         unwanted movement when used on uneven or inclined surfaces                          
                         Designed with high‐quality materials for long durability and durability.            
                         TECHNICAL SPECH                                                                     
                         Minimum Load capacity: approx. 4 kg                                                 
                         Material: Aluminum Ball                                                             
                         Diameter: approx.50 mm Base                                                         
                         Diameter: approx. 52 mm                                                             
                         Height: 6.69" (17 cm)                                                               
                         What's included:                                                                    
                         Tether Tools Rock Solid                                                             
                         Tripod Roller Brake Wheels                                                          
                         Carry‐on bag for transportation and storage                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 68 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐110 Tele Promter  FEATURES                                                                            
                         Equipped with a remote controller, it allows users to control text                  
                         scrolling speed, font size, and brightness. It can be adapted to a variety          
                         of DSLR cameras, camcorders, and smartphones. Easy to use and set up                
                         with foot and mounting plate. Equipped with a hood to minimize                      
                         reflections from the surrounding environment.                                       
                                                                                                             
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         LCD screen:min. 6.5 inches,                                                         
                         resolution :approx. 1024x768                                                        
                         Video Input: HDMI Control: Remote control                                           
                         Power: AC 100‐240V, 50/60 Hz                                                        
                         DC output: 12V                                                                      
                         Camera Compatibility: Various DSLR cameras, camcorders, and                         
                         smartphones                                                                         
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         1 x Main TP‐650 ENG prompter rail                                                   
                         1 x Smaller rail with spacer block for mounting bracket                             
                         2 x 1/4" Screws Length 27mm secures item B to A                                     
                         1 x Hex Tool (Black) for counter sunk Hex head screws                               
                         1 x Hex Tool ( Silver) for Glass Frame Hex screws                                   
                         1 x 1/4" Screw Length 8mm secures item F to B                                       
                         1 x Adjustable Mounting Bracket with locking lever                                  
                         1 x Glass frame with 4 Velcro straps                                                
                         2 x Wing nut screws 1/4" Length 16mm secures item G to A                            
                         1 x Cloth Snood/Hood with Velcro straps                                             
                         1 x 60/40 Glass sheet with Green and Red stickers                                   
                         1 x Snood/Hood support wire                                                         
                         2 x 1/4" Camera securing screws length 16mm                                         
                         2 x 1/4" Camera securing screws length 31mm                                         
                         1 x Camera riser block 15mm thick                                                   
                         1 x Cloth case for Snood, Mirror Glass and Glass frame                              
                         1 x Adapter screw to convert 3/8" hole to 1/4" hole                                 
                         1 x 1/4" Counter sunk hex head screw length 16mm                                    
                         1 x 1/4" Counter sunk hex head screw length 31mm Retail carton with                 
                         protective foam packing                                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐111 Tablet for Presenter Features:                                                                    
                         ProMotion technology: The iPad Pro's ProMotion technology provides                  
                                                                                               Page 69 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         smooth and fast refresh rates, making it ideal for demanding tasks such             
                         as video editing and gaming.                                                        
                         M1 Chip: The M1 chip provides blazing‐fast performance, allowing you                
                         to run demanding apps and multitask with ease.                                      
                         LiDAR Scanner: The LiDAR Scanner provides improved AR experiences,                  
                         enabling you to accurately measure distances and map out your                       
                         environment in 3D.                                                                  
                         Face ID: Face ID uses advanced facial recognition technology to                     
                         securely unlock your iPad Pro, authenticate purchases, and access                   
                         secure apps.                                                                        
                         Rear camera system: The 12 MP ultra‐wide and 10 MP wide lenses                      
                         provide exceptional image quality, making it easy to capture stunning               
                         photos and videos.                                                                  
                         4K video recording: The iPad Pro is capable of recording 4K video at 60             
                         fps, making it a powerful tool for videographers and content creators.              
                         SPESIFIKASI TEKNIS                                                                  
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Display: 12.9‐inch Liquid Retina Display with ProMotion technology                  
                         Resolution: 2778 x 2048 pixels                                                      
                         Processor: Apple M1 Chip                                                            
                         Operating System: iPadOS                                                            
                         RAM: 8 GB                                                                           
                         Internal Storage: 512 GB                                                            
                         Rear Camera: 12 MP ultra‐wide and 10 MP wide lenses                                 
                         Front Camera: 7 MP TrueDepth camera                                                 
                         Video Recording: 4K video recording at 60 fps                                       
                         Battery Life: Up to 10 hours of surfing the web, watching video, or                 
                         listening to music                                                                  
                         Connectivity: Wi‐Fi 6 (802.11ax)                                                    
                         Sensors: Face ID, LiDAR Scanner, Three‐axis gyro, Accelerometer,                    
                         Barometer, Ambient light sensor                                                     
                         Colors: Silver or Space Gray                                                        
                         Supplied included:                                                                  
                         2021 5th generation iPad Pro with a 12.9‐inch display and 512 GB of                 
                         storage                                                                             
                         USB‐C to USB‐C cable                                                                
                         18W USB‐C power adapter                                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 70 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐112 Cinema Sound Recorder Features:                                                                   
                         Equipped with 8 combo XLR/TRS inputs that can be connected with a                   
                         microphone or musical instrument. Equipped with 8 3.5mm jack                        
                         outputs and 2 XLR outputs that can be used for monitoring and audio                 
                         output. Equipped with a digital mixer that can be used to balance and               
                         adjust audio levels. Equipped with the latest microphone preamp                     
                         technology features that produce clear and crisp sound quality.                     
                         Equipped with limiter feature, high‐pass filter, and noise reduction                
                         feature to produce better sound. Comes with a timecode generator                    
                         feature for audio and video synchronization. Equipped with an easy‐to‐              
                         read and intuitive LCD screen for setting and setting audio parameters.             
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Size (HxWxD): approx. 51 x 188 x 119.7 mm                                           
                         Weight: 610 g (without battery)                                                     
                         Minimum Connectivity: 8 inputs combo,                                               
                         8 output 3.5mm jacks, 2 outputs, USB‐C port                                         
                         Minimum Recording resolution: approx. 24‐bit/192kHz                                 
                         Power:min. 8 batery eksternal                                                       
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         Zoom F8n MultiTrack Field Recorder Audio with Mixer                                 
                         F8n Bluetooth Antenna                                                               
                         User manual Warranty card Zoom                                                      
                         Cable USB‐C Straps for battery binding AA Adapter Zoom AD‐19                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐113 Microphone Shotgun KEY FEATURES Features:                                                         
                         Has a uniqueness in the form of a very light body and has a fairly long             
                         length Designed with special acoustic technology that produces                      
                         excellent sound quality Equipped with a shock mount made with high‐                 
                         quality materials, so as to reduce vibration and noise during the                   
                         recording process Equipped with foam windscreen and windshield                      
                         furry that can help reduce noise from wind and other noise It uses an               
                         XLR connection to plug‐and‐play with different types of recording                   
                         equipment.                                                                          
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Pickup Pattern: Supercardioid Minimum                                               
                         Response Frequency: approx. 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz                                          
                         Minimum Impedance Output: min. 25 ohm                                               
                         Maximum SPL: approx. 130 dB SPL (@1kHz, 1% THD into 1K ohm load)                    
                                                                                               Page 71 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Minimum Dynamic Range: approx. 117 dB (per IEC651) S/N                              
                         Ratio: approx. 82 dBA (per IEC651)                                                  
                         Sensitivity: approx. ‐23.5 dB re 1V/Pa (22mV @ 94dB SPL) ± 2dB @                    
                         1kHz                                                                                
                         Power Requirement: P48, P24 phantom power                                           
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         Unit Windshield furry Shock mount Foam windscreen                                   
                         storage and mobile bags                                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐114 Microphone Blimp Features:                                                                        
                         Versatile, adjustable design for use with a variety of microphones                  
                         Internal shock mount for reduced handling noise                                     
                         High‐quality wind protection for outdoor recording                                  
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Specs                                                                               
                         Compatible Mic Diameter : Approx. 0.748 to 0.87" / 19 to 22 mm                      
                         Inner Depth : approx. 5" / 12.7 cm                                                  
                         Outer Diameter: approx. 5" / 125 mm                                                 
                         Length : approx. 19.3" / 490 mm                                                     
                         Weight : approx. 1.2 oz / 34 g                                                      
                         Inputs 1 x 3‐Pin XLR Female                                                         
                         Outputs 1 x 3‐Pin XLR Male                                                          
                         Mounting Thread: approx. 3/8"‐16 Female                                             
                         Supplied Including :                                                                
                         Blimp microphone wind shield system                                                 
                         Shock mount                                                                         
                         Pop shield                                                                          
                         Boom pole holder                                                                    
                         Furry windjammer                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐115 Microphone Micro Boompole Features:                                                               
                         Can be extended to 3.8 meters Made of high‐quality aluminum                         
                         material Equipped with a sturdy twist lock lock easy to use and                     
                         assemble Equipped with ergonomic handles that are comfortable to                    
                                                                                               Page 72 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         use                                                                                 
                                                                                                             
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum length: approx. 1.2 meters                                                  
                         Max length: approx. 3.8 meters                                                      
                         Material: Aluminum                                                                  
                         Maximum weight that can be supported: 1.5 kg                                        
                         Pole diameter: approx. 35 mm                                                        
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         Unit Carrying case                                                                  
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐116 Sound Cinematography Features:                                                                    
         Recording       Equipped with a 40 mm high‐performance driver that provides good                    
         Headphone Field Recording sound resolution Equipped with ear cups that can be rotated by 90         
                         degrees for easy monitoring in one ear Designed with a comfortable                  
                         and adjustable headband so that it can be adjusted to different head                
                         sizes Equipped with a 1/4" TRS jack cable and a 1/8" TRS jack adapter               
                         so that it can be used with various                                                 
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Type: Closed‐back                                                                   
                         Minimum Driver: approx. 40 mm                                                       
                         Minimum Response Frequency: approx. 20 Hz – 20 kHz                                  
                         Minimum Impedance: approx. 32 Ohm                                                   
                         Sensitivity: approx. 96 dB SPL @ 1 kHz, 1mW                                         
                         Maximum Input Power:max. 100 mW                                                     
                         Cable Length:approx 2 m (6.6 ft)                                                    
                         Connectors: 1/4" TRS jack and 1/8"                                                  
                         TRS adapter jack                                                                    
                         Supplied Accessories:                                                               
                         1/4" TRS cable unit                                                                 
                         jack 1/8" TRS jack Adapter                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 73 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐117 Sound Editing Monitor Features:                                                                   
         Speaker         Equipped with a 1 inch diameter tweeter and a 6.5 inch diameter                     
                         woofer that produces clear and detailed sound. Equipped with Room                   
                         Control and High Trim technology that allows users to adjust the sound              
                         to suit the environment and recording needs. Equipped with a class AB               
                         amplifier that provides clear and precise sound. Equipped with a bass‐              
                         reflex port that helps improve bass response. Ergonomic and simple                  
                         design, so it is easy to place in the studio or other rooms.                        
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum Frequency response: 43 Hz ‐ 30 kHz                                          
                         MMaximum output level: 106 dB SPL                                                   
                         Input: XLR, TRS                                                                     
                         Power consumption: 55 W                                                             
                         Impedance: 6 ohms                                                                   
                         Dimensions: 210 mm x 332 mm x 284 mm                                                
                         Weight: 8.2 kg                                                                      
                         Supplied Accessories:                                                               
                         2x Unit                                                                             
                         Power cord                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐118 Arranger Sound Audio Music FEATURES                                                               
         Keyboard        Equipped with 370 styles of music and 148 drum sets, which can be                   
                         customized and stored in the user's memory. It can be used to record                
                         and play music via USB media. Equipped with effect features, such as                
                         delay, reverb, chorus, and EQ. There is a Keyboard Set feature, which               
                         allows users to easily save and load keyboard settings and effects.                 
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum 128 polyphony sounds.                                                       
                         Minimum 7‐inch TFT color touch screen.                                              
                         Minimum Internal memory 960 MB.                                                     
                         Minimum There is a slot for microSD cards up to 32 GB.                              
                         Output L/R, AUX in, headphone out, and MIDI in/out/thru audio.                      
                         Weight: 8.35 kg.                                                                    
                         Supplied Accessories:                                                               
                         Keyboard Arranger.                                                                  
                                                                                               Page 74 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         PS‐1 switch pedal .                                                                 
                         AC cable.                                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐119 Digital Console Creators Features:                                                                
                         20‐channel digital mixer with built‐in audio recorder                               
                         20 XLR/TRS inputs with Phantom Power                                                
                         6‐track simultaneous recording and playback                                         
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Sampling Rate: 44.1/48 kHz                                                          
                         A/D Resolution: 24‐bit/44.1kHz                                                      
                         Total Inputs: 20 (16 mono + 2 stereo)                                               
                         Total Outputs: 10 (6 mono + 2 stereo)                                               
                         Records up to 24bit/96kHz audio to SD card                                          
                         phantom power : max. 48V                                                            
                         Hi‐Z connectivity (channels 1‐2)                                                    
                         26dB pad (channels 3‐16)                                                            
                         Built‐in compression control (Channels 1‐16)                                        
                         Solo buttons for individual channels                                                
                         Variable frequency low‐cut control                                                  
                         Main outputs plus 6 customizable monitor outputs                                    
                         Dedicated headphone output for sound engineer                                       
                         Scene saving function, up to 9 scenes saved at a time                               
                         20 built‐in chorus, delay and reverb effects with adjustable parameters             
                         Two effect busses                                                                   
                         Built‐in slate mic                                                                  
                         Class‐compliant mode (for iOS compatibility)                                        
                         Compatible with Remote Mixer app for iPad                                           
                         Automatic recording starting/stopping capability                                    
                         Pre‐record function                                                                 
                         Import/export projects with USB 2.0 host port                                       
                         Supplied Includding                                                                 
                         all standart acessories                                                             
                         AC adapter                                                                          
                         USB cable                                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 75 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐120 Flat Monitor Headphone Features:                                                                  
                         Professional‐grade audio quality                                                    
                         Tuned flat for accurate monitoring                                                  
                         Circumaural design provides excellent sound isolation                               
                         90‐degree swiveling earcups for easy one‐ear monitoring                             
                         Detachable cables for ease of transport and replacement                             
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Type: Over‐ear, closed‐back dynamic                                                 
                         Minimum Driver Diameter: approx. 40 mm                                              
                         Frequency Response:approx. 15 Hz ‐ 24 kHz                                           
                         Minimum Sensitivity: 96 dB                                                          
                         Minimum Impedance: 35 ohms                                                          
                         Maximum Input Power: 1600 mW at 1 kHz                                               
                         Cable: 3.0 m (9.8'), straight, detachable, single‐sided                             
                         Connector: Gold‐plated stereo mini plug (3.5 mm) and 1/4" screw‐on                  
                         adapter                                                                             
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         3.0 m (9.8') straight cable                                                         
                         6.3 mm (1/4") screw‐on adapter                                                      
                         Carrying pouch                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐121 Soundcard     Features:                                                                           
                         Two high‐quality Scarlett microphone preamps with plenty of                         
                         headroom                                                                            
                         Two line inputs, two instrument inputs and two headphone outputs                    
                         24‐bit/192kHz conversion for high‐quality recordings                                
                         Compact and portable design for on‐the‐go recording                                 
                         Included software bundle for recording and production                               
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         MINIMUM                                                                             
                         Microphone Preamps: 2                                                               
                         Dynamic Range: 110 dB (A‐Weighted)                                                  
                         Frequency Response: 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz ± 0.1dB                                          
                         THD+N: <0.002% (minimum gain, ‐1dBFS input with 22Hz/22kHz                          
                         bandpass filter)                                                                    
                         Maximum input level: +16 dBu                                                        
                         Gain Range: 56 dB                                                                   
                         Line Inputs: 2                                                                      
                                                                                               Page 76 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Dynamic Range: 109 dB (A‐Weighted)                                                  
                         Frequency Response: 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz ± 0.1dB                                          
                         THD+N: <0.003% (minimum gain, ‐1dBFS input with 22Hz/22kHz                          
                         bandpass filter)                                                                    
                         Maximum input level: +22 dBu                                                        
                         Instrument Inputs: 2                                                                
                         Dynamic Range: 107 dB (A‐Weighted)                                                  
                         Frequency Response: 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz ± 0.1dB                                          
                         THD+N: <0.02% (minimum gain, ‐1dBFS input with 22Hz/22kHz                           
                         bandpass filter)                                                                    
                         Maximum input level: +13 dBu                                                        
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         USB Type‐C to Type‐A cable                                                          
                         Quick start guide                                                                   
                         Focusrite software bundle                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐122 DIRECT BOX Ground lift Features:                                                                  
                         Active direct box for connecting guitars, basses, and keyboards to                  
                         mixers and amplifiers                                                               
                         Ground Lift switch for eliminating ground loops                                     
                         High‐quality components for high‐quality sound                                      
                         Extremely rugged, road‐ready construction                                           
                         High‐quality components and exceptionally rugged construction ensure                
                         long life                                                                           
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Type: Active Direct Box                                                             
                         Input Impedance: min. 1 MΩ                                                          
                         Output Impedance: max. 200 Ω                                                        
                         Frequency Response: approx. 20 Hz ‐ 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB                                 
                         THD: <0.05%                                                                         
                         Connectors: Input: 1/4" TS jack, Output: XLR and 1/4" jack                          
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         all standar acessories                                                              
                         ULTRA‐DI DI100 Active Direct Box                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 77 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐123 Sound Recorder Live Digital Features:                                                             
         Mixing          8‐track simultaneous playback and record                                            
                         Four XLR/TRS combo jacks and two additional XLR inputs for a total of               
                         eight inputs                                                                        
                         3.0‐inch color touch screen for easy navigation and operation                       
                         Built‐in effects including reverb, delay, and amp models                            
                         Portable design with a rechargeable battery for mobile recording                    
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Sampling Rate: 96 kHz / 24‐bit                                                      
                         Number of Inputs: 8                                                                 
                         Input Types: XLR/TRS combo jack x4, XLR x2, TRS x2                                  
                         Phantom Power: 48V (global)                                                         
                         Output Types: Stereo TRS x2, Stereo Headphone x1                                    
                         USB Audio Interface: 2‐in/2‐out                                                     
                         Effects: 8‐track simultaneous playback, 8‐track simultaneous record                 
                         Display: 3.0‐inch color touch screen                                                
                         Power Supply: Li‐ion battery, USB bus power                                         
                         Battery Life: Approximately 6 hours                                                 
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         Zoom L8 Portable Recorder/Interface                                                 
                         AC adapter                                                                          
                         Li‐ion battery                                                                      
                         USB cable                                                                           
                         Protective case                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐124 Block Wireless Keyboard Features:                                                                 
         Controller      5D Touch technology for expressive playing                                          
                         24 silicone keywaves for a responsive and dynamic playing experience                
                         Bluetooth MIDI and USB‐C connectivity for seamless integration with a               
                         variety of devices                                                                  
                         Rechargeable battery for portability and convenience                                
                         Lightweight and compact design for easy transport                                   
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Keyboard: 5D Touch                                                                  
                         Keys: 24 silicone keywaves                                                          
                                                                                               Page 78 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Connectivity: Bluetooth MIDI, USB‐C                                                 
                         Power Supply: Rechargeable battery (up to 6 hours of continuous use)                
                         Dimensions:approx 10.5 x 7.5 x 0.5 inches (266 x 190 x 12 mm)                       
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         Roli Seaboard Block MIDI Controller                                                 
                         USB‐C to USB‐A cable                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                                             
 L02‐2‐125 Midi Controller Features:                                                                         
                         25 mini keys with velocity‐sensitive technology for dynamic and                     
                         expressive playing                                                                  
                         8 backlit MPC pads for triggering samples, loops, and other sound clips             
                         8 control knobs for adjusting sound parameters and effects                          
                         Octave up/down buttons and pitch bend and modulation wheels for                     
                         even more control options                                                           
                         USB‐MIDI connectivity for easy integration with a computer or other                 
                         devices                                                                             
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         MINIMUM                                                                             
                         Keyboard: 25 mini keys with velocity‐sensitive technology                           
                         Pads: 8 backlit MPC pads                                                            
                         Knobs: 8 control knobs                                                              
                         Other controls: Octave up/down buttons, Pitch bend and Modulation                   
                         wheels                                                                              
                         Connectivity: USB‐MIDI (cable included), 5‐pin MIDI Out                             
                         Power Supply: USB powered or optional 9V DC adapter (not included)                  
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         MIDI CONTROLLER                                                                     
                         USB cable                                                                           
                         Software                                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐126 Speaker Active Features:                                                                          
                         Compact and lightweight design for easy transport and setup                         
                         10" woofer and 1" compression driver for full‐range sound                           
                                                                                               Page 79 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         10W (LF) and 10W (HF) power rating for high‐volume performance                      
                         XLR‐1/4" combo inputs and link output for easy connectivity with a                  
                         variety of equipment                                                                
                         Durable construction for long‐lasting use in a variety of settings                  
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         REQUIRED                                                                            
                         Type: Active PA speaker                                                             
                         Frequency Response: approx. 50Hz‐20kHz                                              
                         Maximum SPL: approx. 126dB SPL                                                      
                         Power Rating: max. 10W (LF) / 10W (HF)                                              
                         Speaker Components: 10" woofer, 1" compression driver                               
                         Connectors: 2 x XLR‐1/4" combo inputs, Link output                                  
                         Dimensions (W x H x D): approx. 12.2 x 14.2 x 10.8 inches (309 x 361 x              
                         274 mm)                                                                             
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         Speaker Active                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐127 Single 2ch Soundbar with Features:                                                                
         Bluetooth technology 2.0 channel soundbar for a powerful and immersive audio experience             
                         60W total power output for high‐volume performance                                  
                         Dolby Digital audio format support for enhanced sound quality                       
                         Bluetooth, HDMI ARC, Optical, and USB connectivity for easy                         
                         integration with a variety of devices                                               
                         Sleek and compact design for easy integration with a variety of home                
                         entertainment setups                                                                
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Channels: 2.0                                                                       
                         Power Output: max. 60W total                                                        
                         Audio Format Support: Dolby Digital                                                 
                         Connectivity: Bluetooth, HDMI ARC, Optical, USB                                     
                         Dimensions (W x H x D): approx. 36.3 x 2.0 x 3.3 inches (92 x 5 x 8.5 cm)           
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         Soundbar 2ch                                                                        
                         Remote control                                                                      
                         Wall mount bracket                                                                  
                         Optical cable                                                                       
                         Power cable                                                                         
                                                                                               Page 80 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐128 Mac Studio + Dispaly Studio Feature :                                                             
         for Editing cinematoraphi Equipped with a chip with up to 10 CPU cores and 32 GPU cores             
                         Available in 24‐inch or 27‐inch display sizes with 4.5K resolution Retina           
                         display Equipped with 6‐speaker stereo speakers, array microphone                   
                         and FaceTime HD camera with TrueDepth technology Equipped with                      
                         Thunderbolt 4, USB 4, HDMI 2.1, Ethernet, and headphone jack                        
                         connectivity Supports Wi‐Fi 6 connection and Bluetooth 5.0                          
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Processor : Apple M1 10‐core CPU with 8 performance cores and 2                     
                         efficiency cores GPU 24‐core Neural Engine 16‐core Memory                           
                         bandwidth 400 Gbps 32GB Unified                                                     
                         RAM : Min. 512GB SSD 24‐Core GPU | 16‐Core Neural Engine UHS‐II                     
                         SDXC                                                                                
                         Display : Display Studio 27" retina 4,5 K                                           
                         Card Reader Wi‐Fi 6 (802.11ax) |                                                    
                         Bluetooth 5.0 2 x USB 3.1 Gen 1 Type‐A |                                            
                         1 x HDMI 4 x Thunderbolt 4 Ports                                                    
                         2 x USB 3.1 Gen 2 Type‐C Ports                                                      
                         1 x 10 Gigabit Ethernet Ports                                                       
                         macOS                                                                               
                         SUPPLY INCLUDE:                                                                     
                         All Necessary Accessories                                                           
                         Apple Mac Studio                                                                    
                         Magic keyboard and magic mouse                                                      
                         Apple Power Cable                                                                   
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐129 PC Desktop    Feature :                                                                           
         for sound Editing #1 True Tone Audio Technology High‐fidelity six‐speaker system with               
                         subwoofer force‐cancelling Wide‐ranging stereo sound Support for                    
                         spatial audio when playing music or video with Dolby Atmos Studio‐                  
                         quality three‐microphone array with high SNR and directional signal                 
                         shaper                                                                              
                         TECHNICAL SPESIFICATION                                                             
                         Processor : Apple M1 8 Core                                                         
                                                                                               Page 81 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Graphics/GPU :min. 7 core                                                           
                         Memory Integrated memory 8 GB                                                       
                         SSD : min 256 GB                                                                    
                         Screen Size : 24‐inch Screen Screen Type 4.5K 24‐inch                               
                         Retina Display : approx. 4480 x 2520 resolution                                     
                         at 218 pixels per inch with support for 1 billion colors                            
                         Brightness : 500 nits Wide color (P3)                                               
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         All Standar Necessary acessories                                                    
                         magic keybord & magic mouse                                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐130 PC Desktop    Features                                                                            
         for sound Editing #2 PC for editing animation, video, rendering, sound                              
                         TECH SPESIFICATION                                                                  
                         Processor Onboard : min. Intel Core i7‐11700 Processor 2.5GHz (16M                  
                         Cache, up to 4.9 GHz, 8 cores)                                                      
                         Standard Memory :min. 16GB RAM DDR4                                                 
                         Graphics Type :min. NVIDIA® GeForce RTX™ 3060 12GB                                  
                         Hard Disk : min. 1TB HDD 7200RPM + 512 GB SSD M.2 NVMe PCIe®™                       
                         3.0                                                                                 
                         Display :approx 23,9"                                                               
                         Chipset : Intel® I7 11700                                                           
                         Audio : High Definition 7.1 Channel Audio                                           
                         Wireless Network :                                                                  
                         ™ Wi‐Fi 5(802.11ac)+Bluetooth 5.0 (Dual band) 2*2 Onboard                           
                         Expansion : 2x PCIe 3.0 x 1 1x PCIe®® 4.0 x 16 1x M.2                               
                         connector for WiFi 1x M.2                                                           
                         connector for storage 4x DDR4 U‐DIMM                                                
                         Front I/O Port slot : 1x 3.5mm combo audio jack,2x USB 3.2 Gen 1                    
                         Type‐A                                                                              
                         Rear I/O Port :                                                                     
                         1x RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet,1x HDMI 1.4, 2x Display port, 2x PS2, 3x Audio             
                         jacks                                                                               
                         2x USB 2.0 Type‐A, 4x USB 3.2 Gen 1 Type‐A                                          
                         Sistem Operasi : Windows 11 Home                                                    
                         Dimensi :approx. 27.9(W) x 43.3(D) x 50.1(H) cm                                     
                         Power Supply : max. 500W                                                            
                                                                                               Page 82 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         Keyboard & Mouse                                                                    
                         Unit Power cable and USB‐C                                                          
                         cable to power cable User                                                           
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐131 External Editing Grading Features:                                                                
         Monitor Computer stunning 4K Ultra HD resolution, providing four times the resolution of            
                         Full HD for sharp, detailed images.                                                 
                         Picture‐by‐Picture and Picture‐in‐Picture: The Picture‐by‐Picture and               
                         Picture‐in‐Picture modes allow you to display content from multiple                 
                         sources on a single screen.                                                         
                         Multiple Connectivity Options: The monitor provides multiple                        
                         connectivity options, including DisplayPort, HDMI, Mini‐Display Port,               
                         USB, and audio.                                                                     
                         Easy Arrangement: The monitor's small base and adjustable stand allow               
                         you to easily arrange your workspace, compatibility makes it easy to                
                         mount on a wall or arm.                                                             
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Minimum Display: 24‐inch LED‐backlit display with an anti‐glare coating             
                         Minimum Resolution: approx. 3840 x 2160 pixels (4K Ultra HD)                        
                         Aspect Ratio: approx.16:9                                                           
                         Viewing Angle: 178° horizontal/178° vertical                                        
                         Minimum Brightness: 300 cd/m²                                                       
                         Color Support: 1.07 billion colors                                                  
                         Contrast Ratio: approx. 1000:1                                                      
                         Response Time: 6 ms (gray‐to‐gray)                                                  
                         Connectivity: 1 x DisplayPort 1.2, 1 x HDMI 1.4, 1 x Mini‐DisplayPort, 4 x          
                         USB 3.0 downstream ports, 1 x USB 3.0 upstream port, 1 x Audio line‐                
                         out port                                                                            
                         VESA Mount Compatibility: 100mm x 100mm                                             
                         Dimensions (W x D x H): 21.3 x 7.3 x 17.2 inches (540.7 x 185.4 x 437.0             
                         mm)                                                                                 
                         Weight: 8.16 lbs (3.7 kg)                                                           
                         What's included:                                                                    
                         Unit                                                                                
                         Stand and base                                                                      
                         Power cable                                                                         
                         DisplayPort cable                                                                   
                         USB 3.0 upstream cable                                                              
                                                                                               Page 83 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         CD with drivers and documentationI                                                  
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐132 External Monitor Grading                                                                          
         SEMIPROFESSIONAL Feature                                                                            
                         Trace Free Technology, DCIP‐3, ProArt Preset, User mode2, Color                     
                         Temp. coloor Adjustment : 6‐axis adjusment, Gamma adjustment                        
                         ,Color Accurac E< 2, ProArt Palette, QuickFit, PIP / PBP Technology                 
                         ,HDCP, VRR Technology : Adaptive‐Sync,ProArt Chroma Tune,Low Blue                   
                         Light ,Multiple HDR Mode ,Speaker.                                                  
                         Tech specs                                                                          
                         Display Size (inch) :approx. 31,8"                                                  
                         Pixels Per Inch (PPI) :min. 138                                                     
                         Aspect Ratio : approx. 16:9                                                         
                         Display Viewing Area (H x V) : approx. 708.48 x 398.52 mm                           
                         Display Surface : Non‐Glare                                                         
                         Backlight Type : min. LED                                                           
                         Panel Type : min. IPS                                                               
                         Viewing Angle (CR≧10, H/V) : approx. 178°/ 178°                                     
                         Pixel Pitch :approx. 0.1845mm                                                       
                         Resolution : approx. 3840x2160                                                      
                         Color Space (sRGB) :approx. 100%                                                    
                         Brightness (HDR, Peak) : approx. 400 cd/㎡                                           
                         Brightness (Typ.) : approx. 350cd/㎡                                                 
                         Contrast Ratio (Typ.) : approx. 1000:1                                              
                         Display Colors : approx. 1073.7M (10 bit)                                           
                         Response Time : approx. 5ms(GTG)                                                    
                         Refresh Rate (Max) : approx. 60Hz                                                   
                         HDR (High Dynamic Range) Support : HDR10                                            
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         cable adapter/power,                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐133 External Monitor Computer FEATURE                                                                 
         (Audio)         4‐sided frameless display                                                           
                         IPS LED wide view technology for image and color accuracy                           
                                                                                               Page 84 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         TECH SPECS                                                                          
                         Panel Size(Inch) :approx 26,8"                                                      
                         Panel Type : IPS                                                                    
                         Panel Resolution : approx. 2560x1440                                                
                         Aspect Ratio : approx. 16:09                                                        
                         Brightness (cd/㎡) : 350                                                             
                         Refresh Rate(hz) : 75                                                               
                         Response Time (ms) : 1                                                              
                         Sync : FreeSync                                                                     
                         Connectivity : HDMI 1.4 x2 + DP 1.2 x1                                              
                         Speaker : No                                                                        
                         Audio port : 1x 3.5mm Audio Out                                                     
                         VESA mounting (mm) : 100x100                                                        
                         Ergonomic Stand : Yes                                                               
                         Panel bit : 8 bit                                                                   
                         HDR : No                                                                            
                         NTSC (%) :approx. 79                                                                
                         SRGB (%) : approx. 100                                                              
                         Adobe RGB (%) :approx. 82                                                           
                         DCI‐P3 (%) : approx. 89                                                             
                         Power Cons (watt) : max. 19                                                         
                         Supplied Ijncludding :                                                              
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         cable adapter/power,                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐134 External Editing Monitor Feature:                                                                 
         Television 50   Tecnology picture 4K UHD Dynamic Backlight Control helps improve                    
                         energy efficiency by adjusting screen brightness as image content                   
                         changes Power Saving Mode helps save energy by adjusting screen                     
                         brightness Screen Off Mode helps save energy by turning off the image               
                         screen without the need to turn the TV into full standby mode,                      
                         TECH SPECS                                                                          
                         Technology monitor: min. 4K UHD                                                     
                         Display : min. 50 Inch                                                              
                         Resolution : min. approx. 3840 x 2160                                               
                         Built‐In Wi‐Fi & Ethernet                                                           
                         Connectivity Android TV OS                                                          
                         Access the Google Play Store & Apps Apple AirPlay & Chromecast                      
                         built‐in Works with the Google Assistant                                            
                                                                                               Page 85 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         4 x HDMI / 2 x USB Dolby Atmos, DTS Digital Surround X‐Balanced                     
                         Speaker                                                                             
                          Supplied Includding :                                                              
                         Supplied Ijncludding :                                                              
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         cable adapter/power,                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐135 External Editing Monitor Feature                                                                  
         Television 75   Improve energy efficiency by adjusting screen brightness as image                   
                         content changes Power Saving Mode helps save energy by adjusting                    
                         screen brightness Screen Off Mode helps save energy by turning off the              
                         image screen without the need to turn the TV into full standby mode                 
                         Technical Specification :                                                           
                         Led Panel : min. 4K UHD                                                             
                         Resolution : approx. 3840 x 2160                                                    
                         Display : min. 75 inch                                                              
                         Sound: Dolby Atmos                                                                  
                         Technology Built‐In Wi‐Fi & Ethernet                                                
                         Connectivity: Android TV OS                                                         
                         I/O: 4 x HDMI / 2 x USB                                                             
                         Supplied Includding :                                                               
                         Supplied Ijncludding :                                                              
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         cable adapter/power,                                                                
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐136 Editing Console for Features                                                                      
         Photo/Video/Design Small and Portable with Built‐In Battery                                         
                         Keyboard Shortcuts Match Edit Functions                                             
                         Built‐In Search Dial                                                                
                         Bluetooth or USB ConnectivityResolve Compatible with operating                      
                         systems macOS and Windows                                                           
                         Technical Specification :                                                           
                                                                                               Page 86 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Power Usage : 4W max via USB Type‐C.                                                
                         Operating Temperature : approx 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)                            
                         Storage Temperature : approx ‐20° to 60°C (‐4° to 140°F)                            
                         Relative Humidity: approx. 0% to 90% non‐condensing                                 
                         1 x USB Type‐C for software configuration and software updates.                     
                         INCLUDE SUPPLY :                                                                    
                         All standart accesoories                                                            
                         cable USB‐C ke USB‐C                                                                
                         Cable USB‐C ke USB‐A                                                                
                         Editing Console for Photo/Video/Design                                              
                         Editing Software                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐137 Hardisk SSD   Features:                                                                           
                         High‐Speed Game Loading: Drive delivers fast game loading with read                 
                         speeds up to 1000 MB/s.                                                             
                         Portable Design: The compact and lightweight design makes it easy to                
                         carry your games with you wherever you go.                                          
                         Large Capacity: With a 2TB capacity, you can store a large collection of            
                         your favorite games.                                                                
                         Shock Resistant: The drive is built with a 3‐layer shock protection                 
                         system to protect your games from bumps and knocks.                                 
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         Capacity:min. 2TB                                                                   
                         Interface: USB 3.2 Gen 2 (10 Gbps)                                                  
                         Form Factor: 2.5‐inch external drive                                                
                         Read Speed: approx. Up to 1000 MB/s                                                 
                         Write Speed: approx. Up to 1000 MB/s                                                
                         Shock Resistant: Yes, with a 3‐layer shock protection system                        
                         Operating Temperature: approx. 0°C to 35°C                                          
                         Dimensions (W x D x H): approx. 110 x 81 x 21.5 mm                                  
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         All Necessary Acessories                                                            
                         Harddisk                                                                            
                         USB Type‐C to Type‐A cable                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 87 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐138 Field Recorder Features:                                                                          
                         Portable handheld design for easy on‐the‐go recording                               
                         Interchangeable microphone system with four mic inputs for versatile                
                         recording options                                                                   
                         Records WAV files up to 24‐bit/96kHz and MP3 files up to 320kbps                    
                         USB 2.0 connectivity for easy transfer of recordings to a computer                  
                         stereo mini jack input, and headphone jack for a variety of connectivity            
                         options                                                                             
                         Long battery life (up to 20 hours) with 4 AA batteries                              
                         Technical Specs:                                                                    
                         Recorder Type: Portable handheld audio recorder                                     
                         Recording Media SD/SDHC/SDXC cards : approx. up to 128 GB                           
                         Recording Formats WAV: approx. up to 24‐bit/96kHz, MP3 :approx. up                  
                         to 320kbps                                                                          
                         Minimum Connectivity:                                                               
                         USB 2.0, 2 x XLR/TRS combo inputs, stereo mini jack input, headphone                
                         jack                                                                                
                         Battery Life: approx. Up to 20 hours with 4 AA batteries                            
                         Dimensions (W x H x D): approx 180 x 63 x 165 mm                                    
                         Supply Includes:                                                                    
                         Field Recorder                                                                      
                         XYH‐6 X/Y microphone capsule                                                        
                         Four AA batteries                                                                   
                         USB cable                                                                           
                         Protective carrying case                                                            
                         Cubase LE and WaveLab LE software downloads                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐139 Lens Camera   Feature:                                                                            
                         Supporrting lens for high quality detailed shot and bokeh effect                    
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Focal Length : Max.85mm                                                             
                         Aperture: Min. F/1.4 Max. F/22                                                      
                         Supply: Including:                                                                  
                                                                                               Page 88 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         1 Bag Lens                                                                          
                         1 lens cap                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐140 Kamera mirorles Feature:Mirorrless camera with the ability to take pictures and record            
                         videos in 4k quality                                                                
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Sensor type: Min. CMOS                                                              
                         Resolution: Min. 8216 x 5477                                                        
                              Max. 9600 x 6376                                                               
                         Sensor size (mm): Min. 23.8 x 35.7                                                  
                                 Max. 23.9 x 35.9                                                            
                         Color filter array: Max. RGB Bits                                                   
                         per pixel: Max. 14.0                                                                
                         Focal length multiplier: Min. 1                                                     
                         Aspect Ratio: MIn. 3:2                                                              
                         ISO latitude: 32 ‐ Min. 102400                                                      
                         Max. 100 ‐ 51200                                                                    
                         Shutter type: Min. Electronic/Mechanical                                            
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 Baterai                                                                           
                         1 Charger                                                                           
                         1 tali Streep                                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐141 Monitor Preview Feature:                                                                          
                         4K display monitor that suitability of light, color and composition when            
                         shooting a video.                                                                   
                         Tecnical spesification:Display: Min. 1920 x 1200 Touchscreen                        
                         DisplayResolusi : Min. 4K HDMIBrightness : Min. 2000 Max.                           
                         2400Conector system: Min. HDMI/SDI Cross ConversionBatrey : Min.                    
                         Dual Sony L‐Series Battery Slots                                                    
                                                                                                             
                                                                                               Page 89 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         1 Adaptor listrik                                                                   
                         1 Kabel HDMI                                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐142 Continues Light Feature:                                                                          
                         Lighting that emits continuous light, continuous light can be used for              
                         shooting and video footage.                                                         
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Controler: MIn. Light with Manual Controller max. Light with Controller             
                         & Power Supply                                                                      
                         Color Temperature : Min. 5500K                                                      
                         Cooler : Min Fan Cooling Max. Quiet Fan‐Cooling                                     
                         Construction : Min. Aluminum                                                        
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 unit lighting                                                                     
                         1 power cable                                                                       
                         1 tripod bracket                                                                    
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐143 Studio Flash Light Feature:                                                                       
                         Lighting Studio Package with the ability to emit flash light (flash) so it is       
                         very suitable for shooting (photography)                                            
                         Tecnical spesification                                                              
                         Power Output : Max. 800WGN :                                                        
                                Min. (2m,ISO300),                                                            
                         Output Control Range : MIn. Full to 1/32                                            
                         Stepless Max. Full to 1/64                                                          
                         SteplessFlash Duration : Min. 1/800th~1/1200th                                      
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         3 pcs Studio Flash E 800                                                            
                         1 pc Barndoor For CR18/DR18                                                         
                         1 pc Honeycomb grid HC‐20                                                           
                         1 softbox 100 x 1001 pc Syncro Cable                                                
                                                                                               Page 90 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         3 pcs Grand Light Stand (E‐L‐2900GA/B)                                              
                         1 pc Travel Bag (3 Lamp)                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐144 Multi Converter Hub (Game Feature:                                                                
         Tech. Lab)      Versatile converter hub with USB Type‐C input for various in/out device             
                         and data transfer needs. with aluminium alloy material                              
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Conector : Min. Type‐C                                                              
                         Input:                                                                              
                         Min. 3 USB 3.0 Ports                                                                
                         Min. 1 VGA Port (Max resolution up to 1920x1080 @60Hz)                              
                         MIn. 1 Ethernet Port                                                                
                         Min. 1 SD Card Slot                                                                 
                         Min. 1 Micro SD                                                                     
                         MIn. 1 HDMI port                                                                    
                         Min. 1 PD Port                                                                      
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 unit Hub                                                                          
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐145 Snoot Lens    Performance                                                                         
                         Focal Length 24mm                                                                   
                         Aperture                                                                            
                         Maximum: f/14                                                                       
                         Minimum: f/40                                                                       
                         Features:                                                                           
                         Manual Autofocus, Physical, ‐grade probe lens                                       
                         It can cover both standard 35mm full frame & Super35 image sensors.                 
                         Technical Spesification :                                                           
                         Camera Mount Type                                                                   
                         Performance Focal Length : min 24mm                                                 
                         Aperture : Maximum: f/14                                                            
                             Minimum: f/40                                                                   
                         Format Compatibility: min. 35mm Film / Full‐Frame Digital Sensor                    
                                                                                               Page 91 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Angle of View : approx. 85°                                                         
                         Minimum Focus Distance : min. 1.54' / 47 cm                                         
                         Magnification : min. 2.0x                                                           
                         Maximum Reproduction Ratio : Approx. 1:0.5                                          
                         Optical Design : approx. 27 Elements in 19 Groups                                   
                         Diaphragm Blades : min. 7                                                           
                         Dimensions : approx. 38 x 408 mm                                                    
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         apailable)                                                                          
                         transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run, warranty             
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐146 4K Projector  Feature:                                                                            
                         Hight resolution screen projection with 7000 lumens light and                       
                         complete prt in/out                                                                 
                         Technical Spesification:                                                            
                         Resolution: Approx WUXGA (1920 x 1200)                                              
                         Light: MIn. 5000lumens, Max. 7000 lumens                                            
                         Lamps: Min. Dual lamps                                                              
                         Color wheels: Min Two 6‐segment                                                     
                         Input: Min. 3G‐SDI, DVI‐D, HDMI, VGA                                                
                         Supply: Including:                                                                  
                         1 Monitor Display                                                                   
                         1 Input Cable                                                                       
                         1 Power Cable                                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐147 Monitor Computer Feature:                                                                         
                         Display Full HD Color Monitor Panel with high resolution                            
                         Technical Spesification:                                                            
                         Display Type: Min. TN Panel, Max. IPS                                               
                         Ratio: Min. 16:9                                                                    
                         Brightness : Min. 240 nits                                                          
                         Screen finishing: Anti‐glare                                                        
                         Color Gamut: Min. 60% NTSC                                                          
                         Connectivity: Min. 1 VGA & HDMI                                                     
                                                                                               Page 92 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supply: Include:                                                                    
                         1 Monitor Displa                                                                    
                         1 Power Cable                                                                       
                         1 Input Cable                                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐148 Action Camera Feature:                                                                            
                         180 ‐ 360 degree camera for captures photo and video with hight                     
                         quality result, waterproof, hight capacity storage and support iOS                  
                         Technical Spesification:                                                            
                         Number of Lenses: 2                                                                 
                         Max Video Resolution: Min. 24 fps Max. 30 fps                                       
                         Photo Resolution: Min 15 Megapixels Max. 24 Megapixels                              
                         Aperture: Min. f/2.2 Max. f/2.4                                                     
                         Waterproof: Min. Splashproof Max. 10m                                               
                         Memory: MicroSD Min. 128GB Max. 256GB                                               
                         Battery: Min. 800mAh Max. 1500 mAh                                                  
                         Compatibility: iOS                                                                  
                         Supply Include:                                                                     
                         1 360 cam                                                                           
                         1 Charging cable                                                                    
                         1 Charging adapter                                                                  
                         1 USB cable                                                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐149 Recording Tool Feature:                                                                           
                         Studio sound artists, hook up a couple of mics, and other music device.             
                         Input:                                                                              
                         Computer Connectivity : Min. USB 2.0                                                
                         Simultaneous I/O : Min. 2 x 2                                                       
                         Number of Preamps : Min. 2                                                          
                         A/D Resolution : Min. 24‐bit/192kHz                                                 
                         Analog Inputs : Min. 2 x XLR/TRS Combo                                              
                         Analog Outputs : Min. Approx 2 x 1/4″, 1 x 1/4″ (Headphones                         
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 Sound recording device                                                            
                                                                                               Page 93 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         1 Charging cable                                                                    
                         3 In/Out cable                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐150 Pen Display   Features:                                                                           
                         Pen display with good vibrant color, HD clarity and ergonomic design                
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Compatibility: Max. Windows, Mac & Chromebook                                       
                         Drawing Area: Min. 344 x 194mm                                                      
                         Screen size: Max. 15.6"                                                             
                         Resolution: Max.1920 x 1080px                                                       
                         Pixel Density: Min. 140ppi Max. 283ppi                                              
                         Anti‐glare reflection: Yes                                                          
                         Horizontal viewing angle: Min. 88 degree Max. 179                                   
                         Vertical viewing angle: 88 degree Max. 179                                          
                         Contras Ratio: Max. 1200:1                                                          
                         Adobe RGB Coverage: Min 95% Max. 121%                                               
                         Pen pressure level: Max. 8192                                                       
                         Pen resolution Max. 5080 LPI                                                        
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 pen display                                                                       
                         1 pen stylus                                                                        
                         1 pen holder                                                                        
                         1 power Cable                                                                       
                         1 HDMI port                                                                         
                         1 USB‐A port                                                                        
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐151 VR Headset    Feature:                                                                            
                         All‐In‐One Gaming                                                                   
                         Immersive Entertainment                                                             
                         Wireless Network                                                                    
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Weight : Min. 503g Max. 702g                                                        
                         Adjustable IPD : Yes                                                                
                         Screen size : Min. 5.46" Max. 6.8"                                                  
                         Resolution : Min. 2160 x 2160px Max. 3664 x 1920px                                  
                                                                                               Page 94 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Field of view : Min. 100° Max. 114°                                                 
                         Refresh rate : Max. 90Hz                                                            
                         Display type : LCD                                                                  
                         Adjustable lenses : Yes                                                             
                         Number of cameras : Min. 4 Max. 6                                                   
                         USB Version : Min. 3 Max.3.2                                                        
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 VR Headset                                                                        
                         2 Touch Controllers                                                                 
                         1 Cable                                                                             
                         2 AA Batteries                                                                      
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐152 Motion Capture Feature:                                                                           
                         Capture body, finger and face animations in a single take                           
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Min. 1 suit fullbody movement capture                                               
                         Min. 1 set gloves movement capture                                                  
                         MIn. 1 face movement capture                                                        
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 Suit                                                                              
                         1 Tracking sensors                                                                  
                         1 Bag                                                                               
                         1 USB power cables                                                                  
                         1 Short USB power                                                                   
                         1 Case                                                                              
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐153 Game Console  Feature:                                                                            
                         Tempest 3D AudioTech                                                                
                         Backwards compatibility                                                             
                         Support of 4K                                                                       
                         Haptic Technology                                                                   
                         Adaptive Triggers                                                                   
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                                                                                               Page 95 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Floating‐point performance: Min. 10.0 TFLOPS Max. 12 TFLOPS                         
                         RAM: Max. 16GB                                                                      
                         GPU clock speed: Min. 1820MHz Max. 2240MHz                                          
                         I/O throughput: Min. 2.4GB/s Max. 5.5GB/s                                           
                         GDDR memory: Max. 6                                                                 
                         DDR memory: Max. 6                                                                  
                         Shading units: Min. 2300 Max. 3330                                                  
                         Refresh rate: Max. 120Hz                                                            
                         Output resolution: Max. 8K                                                          
                         Internal storage: Min. 825GB Max. 1000GB                                            
                         Wi‐Fi version: Min. Wi‐Fi 5 Max. Wi‐Fi 6                                            
                         USB ports: Min. 3 Max. 4                                                            
                         HDMI version: Max. HDMI 2.1                                                         
                         USB version: Max. 3.1                                                               
                         Supply include                                                                      
                         1 Console                                                                           
                         1 Joystick                                                                          
                         1 Power cable                                                                       
                         1 USB                                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐154 TAB for Illustration Device Feature:                                                              
                         Hight resolution screen with retina display for support all in drawing              
                         activites and eye's care.                                                           
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Resolution: Max. 2732 x 2048px                                                      
                         RAM: Max. 6GB                                                                       
                         CPU Speed: Max. 2.49GHz                                                             
                         Pixel density: Max. 265ppi                                                          
                         Screen size: Max. 12.9                                                              
                         Battery power: Max. 9720mAh                                                         
                         Internal storage: 512GB                                                             
                         Thickness: Max. 6mm                                                                 
                         Supply include                                                                      
                         1 Tablet                                                                            
                         1 Charging cable                                                                    
                         1 Power Adapter                                                                     
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                                                                                               Page 96 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐155 Illustration Pencil Feature:                                                                      
                         Koneksi: Bluetooth                                                                  
                         Fitur tambahan: Menempel dan pairing secara magnetis                                
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Panjang: Min. 165 mm                                                                
                         Diameter: Min. 8,8 mm                                                               
                         Berat: Min. 20 g                                                                    
                                                                                                             
                         Supply include                                                                      
                         1 Pen                                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐156 Computer iMac for Design Feature:                                                                 
                         Hight Quality display computer with retina display and HIGHT COLOR                  
                         ACURACY                                                                             
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         RAM: Max. 16GB                                                                      
                         Pixel density: Max. 333ppi                                                          
                         Resolution: Max. 4480 x 2520px                                                      
                         CPU speed: Max. M1 4 x 3.2GHz                                                       
                         Storage: Max. 1TB                                                                   
                         Brightness: Max. 500 nits                                                           
                         Screen size: Max. 24"                                                               
                         Bluetooth ver.: Max. 5                                                              
                         USB version: Max. 3                                                                 
                         Wi‐Fi ver.: Max. Wi‐Fi 6 (802.11ax)                                                 
                         Thunderbolt ports: Max. 2                                                           
                         Suply including:                                                                    
                         1 unit PC                                                                           
                         1 kabel power                                                                       
                         1 keyboard                                                                          
                         1 mouse                                                                             
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                               Page 97 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐157 PC Desktop Workstation Feature:                                                                   
                         PC Desktop with hight performance processor featured SSD and HQ                     
                         Graphic                                                                             
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Processor: Min. Intel Core i7‐10700                                                 
                         RAM: Max. 16GB DDR4                                                                 
                         Storage: Min. SSD 256GB + SATA 1 TB                                                 
                         VGA: Min. Intel UHD Graphics 630 Max. NVIDIA MX                                     
                         Sistem Operasi: Min. Windows 10 Max. Windows 11 H                                   
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 PC                                                                                
                         1 Power Cable                                                                       
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐158 Laptop for Gaming Design Feature:                                                                 
                         Display FPS with IPS Panel, supported with NVIDIA GeForce® RTX 3070,                
                         backlit keyboard and SSD storage                                                    
                         Tecnical spesification:                                                             
                         Processor: Min. Intel Core i7‐11800H Max. Intel Core i9‐12900H                      
                         RAM: Min. Min. 16GB                                                                 
                         Storage: Min. 1 TB SSD                                                              
                         VGA: Min. NVIDIA® GeForce RTX 3060, Max.NVIDIA® GeForce RTX 3070                    
                         Ukuran Layar: IPS Panel QHD                                                         
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 laptop                                                                            
                         1 carging adapter                                                                   
                         1 bag                                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐159 Laptop 2in1 for Drawing Feature:                                                                  
                         2in1 foldable flip laptop with touchscreen panel and stylus pen for                 
                         creative working activities.                                                        
                         Technical Spesification:                                                            
                                                                                               Page 98 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Proccesor: Min. Intel Core I7 10750H, Max. Intel Core I9 12900H                     
                         Memory: Min. 16 GB DDR4                                                             
                         Storage : Min. 512GB SSD Max. 1 TB SSD                                              
                         Graphics : Min. NVIDIA Quadro T1000 Max. NVIDIA GeForce RTX 3050                    
                         (4GB GDDR6)                                                                         
                         Display : Min. 13,4 inch Max. 14 inch IPS                                           
                         OS : Min. Windows 10 PRO                                                            
                         Suply including:                                                                    
                         1 unit laptop                                                                       
                         1 charging adapter                                                                  
                         1 stylus pen                                                                        
                         1 tas                                                                               
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                         "Preferred to be procured locally"                                                  
 L02‐2‐160 Large Format Printer (Graph. Feature:                                                             
         Tech. lab)      Large format inkjet printer for hight resolution printing                           
                         Technical spesification:                                                            
                         Printing Technology: Min. Inkjet for Photography                                    
                         Nozzle Configuration: Max. 12 Channels                                              
                         Max. Print Resolution: Up to 2400 x 1200 dpi                                        
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1 Printer                                                                           
                         1 Set Prinhead                                                                      
                         1 Set Tinta                                                                         
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐161 3D Printer    Feature:                                                                            
                         Quick sent file with Wi‐Fi, USB, Ethernet, or with a USB drive.Control              
                         multiple printers to multiple build plates sequentially or                          
                         simultaneously. Comprehensive coverage plans and responsive                         
                         expertise forhigh quality products best.                                            
                         Technical Spesification:                                                            
                         Print Technology: Min. Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM)Build                         
                         Volume: Min. 30 L X 20 W X 17 H CMLayer                                             
                                                                                               Page 99 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Resolution: Min 100 microns [0.0039 IN]                                             
                         Material Diameter: Max. 1.75 mm [0.069 in]                                          
                         Material Compatibility: Min. Large Spool, Small SpoolProduct                        
                         Dimensions: Min. 52.8 L X 44.1 W X 41.0 H CM[20.8 X 17.4 X 16.2 IN]:                
                         Min 18.3 KG [40.4 LBS]                                                              
                         Connectivity: Min. USB, Ethernet, WifiAmbient Operating Temperature:                
                         Min: 15‐32°C [60‐90°F]                                                              
                         Storage Temperature: Min. 0‐38°C [32‐100°F]                                         
                         Supported File Types: STL, OBJ                                                      
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         1. Extruder/Nozzle                                                                  
                         1. Spool PLA                                                                        
                         1. Cable                                                                            
                         1. License Certification                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐162 Digital Printing Outdoor Featured                                                                 
                         :High speed printerSuitable with various Outdoor                                    
                         Tecnical Specification                                                              
                         Materials:                                                                          
                         Printhead: Min. KM 512i (30 PL)                                                     
                         Number of Printhead: 4 HeadsInk: 4 Colors (CMYK)Printing                            
                         Speed with 8 Head Min. 240‐250m/hour                                                
                         Rip Software: Photoprint                                                            
                         File Format: Bitmaps, tiff, jpeg, postscript3, pdf, etcElectrical                   
                         Requirement: Min. 50Hz/60Hz, 220V\(‐+10%) > 20A                                     
                         Power: Max (infrared/non‐infrared)                                                  
                         Enviromental Requirements Ambient                                                   
                         temp: Max 20‐30 C                                                                   
                         Relative humidity: 40‐70%                                                           
                         Media Width: Max 330 cm                                                             
                         Printing Width: Max 320 cm                                                          
                         Roll Dimensions: Max 35 cm (13.77") diameter                                        
                         Media type: Paper, Advertising Banner, PVC, Mesh fabrics, Adhesive                  
                         vinyl, etc                                                                          
                         Dimension:approx. 451x75x142 cm)                                                    
                         Supply Include:                                                                     
                                                                                              Page 100 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         1. 4 units of Printhead                                                             
                         1. Material 1 Roll                                                                  
                         1 Cmyk Ink                                                                          
                         1 Gallon                                                                            
                         1. Solvent                                                                          
                         1 Gallon                                                                            
                         ‐ opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐163 Printer UV LED Featured:                                                                          
                         UV LED Printer Machine Printer with UV Light technology (Ultraviolet)               
                         Sharp ink and strong color resistance both Outdoor and Indoor,                      
                         Printing medium: Wood, Plastic, Glass, Leather, Paper, Acrylic, PVC,                
                         Aluminum, Iron, StainlessHigh resolution                                            
                         Tecnical Specification                                                              
                         :Working Area: Min: 260x430mm                                                       
                         Print Height: Min. 40mm                                                             
                         Print Speed: Min. 10 min                                                            
                         Operating System: Min. Windows 732 Bit, 64 Bit                                      
                         Electricity: Max. 60 Watt                                                           
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1. Printer                                                                          
                         1. Ink                                                                              
                         1. Software                                                                         
                         1. CD+Manual Book                                                                   
                         1. Stick Cleaner Head                                                               
                         1. PET FILM UV DTF                                                                  
                         1. Silicon Grease                                                                   
                         1. Cleaner Head & Cupping                                                           
                         1. Bottom fill                                                                      
                         1. Injection                                                                        
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐164 Mesin Laminasi Dingin Feature:                                                                    
                         Frame Meta lLaminasi glossy & matte Roll adjustable                                 
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Laminate Width: Max. 160cm                                                          
                                                                                              Page 101 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Working Lever: Manual                                                               
                         Dimensions: approx. 190 x 50 x 50 Cm                                                
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1. Rubber Roll                                                                      
                         opration and maintenence books in english or Bahasa indonesia ( if                  
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐165 Printer ID Card Featured :                                                                        
                         Single slide print Max hopper 100 card sublimation printing technology              
                         and Single Sided                                                                    
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Side Printing: Min. Single Side                                                     
                         Resolution: Min. 300dpi                                                             
                         Print Speed: Min 6 seconds per card (K*) •                                          
                         Min 8 seconds per card (KO*)                                                        
                         MIn Approx 16 seconds per card (YMCKO*)                                             
                         Min Approx 24 seconds per card (YMCKOK*)                                            
                         Accepted Area: Min. Input: 100 cards (.030 ̋ / .762 mm)                             
                         Output: Single Sided: Up to 30 cards.                                               
                         Memory RAM: Min. 32 MB                                                              
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐166 Printer Sublim Feature:                                                                           
                         Printer A3+ BorderlessSistem infus 6 warna                                          
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Printing Technology: Min. Micro Piezo™ printhead                                    
                         technologyResolution: Min. 5700 x 1400 dpi Max. 9700 x 2500 dpt                     
                         Tinta: 6 coloursPrint Resolution & Speed: Min. 15 ppm / 15ppmCetak                  
                         Default 10x15cm/4x6": Approx. 45 Sec/photo (Borderless)                             
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1. Tinta                                                                            
                         1. Print head                                                                       
                         1 Kabel USB                                                                         
                         1 Kabel Power                                                                       
                                                                                              Page 102 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐167 Mesin Print & Cut Feature:                                                                        
                         Print and Cut sekali Proses Area Print dan Cutting: Up to 80cm                      
                                                                                                             
                         Tecnical Spesification:Print Head: Min. Epson DX 7 Ink Type: Min. Eco               
                         SolventResolution: Min. 1440 dpiPrint Width: Max. 820 mmMedia                       
                         Width: Max. 850 mmMedia Thickness: Min. 1.0 mmPower Supply: Max.                    
                         AC 220v ‐1920wattDimension: Max. 200 x 70 x 140 cmWeight Max. 130                   
                         Kg                                                                                  
                                                                                                             
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1. Printhead                                                                        
                         2. Tinta                                                                            
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐168 Printer DTF   Featured:                                                                           
                         Print HeadPrinting on light and dark colored clothes                                
                         Tecnical Specification:                                                             
                         Machine & Print Head: Min. L1800                                                    
                         Ink Type: Min. Direct TF                                                            
                         Ink Max. DTF                                                                        
                         Image Size: Max. A3 (29.7 x 42 cm)                                                  
                         Colour: CMYK+WW (White White)                                                       
                         Power Supply: Max. AC 220v ; 50‐60 Hz                                               
                         Power Consumption: Max. 36 Watt                                                     
                         Operating System: Windows XP, Vista, 7 ‐ 32bit, 64bit                               
                         Dimension: Approx.70 x 80 x 50 cm                                                   
                         Supply including:                                                                   
                         1. DTF A3                                                                           
                         2 Printer Machine Unit. Set Inject Color                                            
                         3. Bottle Color Base (Dark and Light)                                               
                         4. CD Driver                                                                        
                         5. CD Software                                                                      
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
                                                                                              Page 103 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐169 Digital Paper Cutting Machine Featured:                                                           
                         Has a 49 cm working area that is ajustable with landscape orientation               
                         and portrait Tecnical Specification: Press 8 Blades using a torpisah                
                         motor Equipped with safety sensors Back and forth paper using                       
                         stepping motor Accurate digital size storage memory (history size                   
                         cutting) Motor blade 220VAC 950Watt Blade rnudah replaced Up and                    
                         down knife / tilt pisou biso disot dongan easy                                      
                         Tecnical Spesification:                                                             
                         Max. Cutting Size 49 cm                                                             
                         Min. Cutting Size 4 cm                                                              
                         Cut Thickness ±80 mm                                                                
                         Cutting Precision ±0.4 mm                                                           
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         1. T Key Wrench 3pcs                                                                
                         2. L key 4 pcs                                                                      
                         3. Hook                                                                             
                         4. Sensor stoper                                                                    
                         5. Lever 2pcs                                                                       
                         6. Foot Legs 1set                                                                   
                         7. Screw driver + 1pcs                                                              
                         8. Bolt nut 1set9. Power Cable 1pcs                                                 
                         10. Hose 4pcs                                                                       
                         11. Material Pusher 1pcs                                                            
                         12. Knife Unit                                                                      
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐170 Portable Audio Recorder Features:                                                                 
                         USB direct connection for fast file transfers                                       
                         Expand memory with the micro SD card slot                                           
                         Auto Voice Recording reduces background noise                                       
                         Low cut filter removes unwanted noise                                               
                         Extra long battery life for longer recordings                                       
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         BATTERY TYPE: Dry Battery                                                           
                         BATTERY TYPE: AAA x2                                                                
                         BUILT‐IN MEMORY: min. 4GB                                                           
                         BUILT‐IN MICROPHONE: Stereo                                                         
                         MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FILES PER FOLDER: min. 199                                        
                         MAXIMUM FILES (TOTAL): min. 5000                                                    
                         LPCM MAXIMUM RECORDING TIME 44.1KHZ, 16BIT: min. approx. 5                          
                                                                                              Page 104 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Hours 20 Min                                                                        
                         MP3 MAXIMUM RECORDING TIME 192KBPS: min. approx. 39 Hours 45                        
                         Min                                                                                 
                         MP3 MAXIMUM RECORDING TIME 128KBPS: min. approx. 59 Hours 35                        
                         Min                                                                                 
                         MP3 MAXIMUM RECORDING TIME 48KBPS (MONAURAL): min. approx.                          
                         159 Hours                                                                           
                         BATTERY LIFE FOR 44.1KHZ, 16BIT LPCM RECORDING: min. approx. 40                     
                         Hours                                                                               
                         BATTERY LIFE FOR 192KBPS MP3 RECORDING: min. approx. 55 Hours                       
                         BATTERY LIFE FOR 128KBPS MP3 RECORDING: min. approx. 57 Hours                       
                         BATTERY LIFE FOR 48KBPS (MONAURAL) MP3 RECORDING: min.                              
                         approx. 62 Hours                                                                    
                         LPCM FREQUENCY RESPONSE 44.1KHZ, 16BIT: min. approx. 50‐20,000                      
                         Hz                                                                                  
                         192KBPS MP3 FREQUENCY RESPONSE: min. approx. 50‐20,000 Hz                           
                         128KBPS MP3 FREQUENCY RESPONSE: min. approx. 50‐16000 Hz                            
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         ‐ Components Operation and Maintenance Manual book in English                       
                         ‐ Transport to Location and Installation                                            
 L02‐2‐171 VideomIc Pro  Features:                                                                           
                         • Broadcast quality dynamic capsule                                                 
                         • Optimised for speech applications                                                 
                         • Internal pop fi lter to minimise plosives                                         
                         • Robust, all metal construction                                                    
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Acoustic Principle: Dynamic                                                         
                         Polar Pattern: Cardioid                                                             
                         Frequency Range: approx. 20Hz up to 20 kHz                                          
                         Output Impedance: approx. 320Ω                                                      
                         Sensitivity:approx. ‐57.0dB re 1 Volt/Pascal (1.60mV @ 94 dB SPL) +/‐ 2             
                         dB @ 1kHz                                                                           
                         Output Connection: XLR                                                              
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐172 Camcorder     Features                                                                            
                         UHD 4K Resolution, 1.0‐Type MOS Sensor                                              
                                                                                              Page 105 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         8‐Mode Gamma, MOV / MP4 / AVCHD Formats                                             
                         Composite, Variable Gain Selector Switch                                            
                         Technical Specifications:                                                           
                         ‐ Lens : approx. 25.4 to 367.5mm ,                                                  
                         ‐ Optical Zoom: min. 15x                                                            
                         ‐ Image Stabilizer : 5‐Axis Hybrid                                                  
                         ‐ 2 x SDHC / SDXC Card Slots, UHS‐I Support                                         
                         ‐ Variable Rate Recording up to 60 fps                                              
                         ‐ Video Output : 8‐Bit 4: 2: 0 HDMI                                                 
                         Supllied including:                                                                 
                         ‐ Standard Accessories                                                              
                         ‐ Cables                                                                            
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐173 Headphone     Features:                                                                           
                         connect wirelessly                                                                  
                         battery life up to 60hrs                                                            
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Type Closed back dynamic                                                            
                         Driver: min. approx. 40mm                                                           
                         Sensitivity: approx. 100dB/mW                                                       
                         Frequency Response: min. approx 50 to 20.000Hz                                      
                         Microphone Type Electret condenser                                                  
                         Polar pattern Omnidirectional                                                       
                         Sensitivity: approx. ‐42 DB (1v/Pa, at 1 khz)                                       
                         Support Codec: AAC, SBC                                                             
                         Bluetooth: min. 5.0                                                                 
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐174 Tripod        Features:                                                                           
                         fashionable tripod , center column support vertical and horizatal invert            
                         center column with 360°pan rotation ,perfect for panoramic shoot                    
                         transverse center column, better for low angel shoot, macro shot                    
                         pull‐out angel adjustment system                                                    
                         damping panoramic ball head                                                         
                         monopod                                                                             
                                                                                              Page 106 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         more stable in wind situation                                                       
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Max. working height: min. approx. 1.56m                                             
                         Folded height:min. approx. 430cm                                                    
                         Net weight: approx. 1.6KG                                                           
                         Material of tripod: alluminum alloy                                                 
                         Max. load: min. approx. 8KG                                                         
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         1 x tripod (With ball head)                                                         
                         1 x 6 angle key                                                                     
                         1 x protective bag for ball head                                                    
                         1 x protective bag for tripod                                                       
                         1 x waist bag                                                                       
                         1 x strap                                                                           
                         Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                  
                         available) ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial              
                         run, warranty manufacture                                                           
 L02‐2‐175 Notebook      Technical Specification:                                                            
                         ‐ Processor :min. 11th Gen Intel core i7                                            
                         ‐ OS : Windows 11                                                                   
                         ‐ Memory : min. 16GB DDR4 SODIMM                                                    
                         ‐ Storage : min. 512GB SSD                                                          
                         ‐ Display : 14" FHD (approx.1300x700)                                               
                         ‐ Graphics :min. NVIDIA GeForce MX330 2GB                                           
                         ‐ Network : 802.11a/b/g/n/acR2+ax wireless LAN and Wireless Wi‐Fi 6                 
                         AX201                                                                               
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         ‐ All device drivers                                                                
                         ‐ Power Cable                                                                       
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐176 All in One Deskstop Features:                                                                     
         Computer #1     AIO with high performance to support business | 2MP Rotatable                       
                         Webcam                                                                              
                         Technical Specification                                                             
                         Processor: min. Intel Core i7‐12700 (Up to 4.90GHz, 25MB Cache);                    
                         RAM: Min. 16GB DDR4;                                                                
                         Storage:Min. 1TB SSD;                                                               
                                                                                              Page 107 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         VGA: Intel UHD Graphics;                                                            
                         Display : Min. 23,8 inch                                                            
                         Network & Com : WIFI 802.11 ax/ac/a/b/g/n + Bluetooth                               
                         Gigabit LAN, Card Reader,                                                           
                         Interface/ Ports : DVDRW, HDMI, Display Port, USB                                   
                         Software : OHS 2021                                                                 
                         Operating System minimum Windows 11 Home                                            
                         Supplied includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                         "Preffered to be Procured to Locally"                                               
 L02‐2‐177 All in One Deskstop Features :                                                                    
         Computer #2     AIO with high performance to support business | 2MP Rotatable                       
                         Webcam                                                                              
                         Processor: Intel Core i7‐8700 (12M Cache, up to 4.60 GHz)                           
                         Memory: 8GB DDR4                                                                    
                         Hard Drive: 512GB SSD                                                               
                         VGA: Intel UHD Graphics                                                             
                         Networking: Gigabit Ethernet, 802.11ac/a/b/g/n, Bluetooth                           
                         Audio: Built‐in stereo speaker / I/O                                                
                         ports: VGA, 2x USB 3.1 Gen1, RJ45, Display Port, 2x USB 3.1 Gen 2, USB              
                         Type‐C, USB 3.1 Gen 2, SDCard, Audio Jack /                                         
                         Monitor: 21.5 inch FHD                                                              
                         Software : OHS 2021                                                                 
                         Operating System minimum Windows 11 Home                                            
                         Supplied includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                         "Preffered to be Procured to Locally"                                               
 L02‐2‐178 Monitor       Feature :                                                                           
                         Type Curved 4K UHD TV                                                               
                         Screen Type: Curved Panel                                                           
                         Design Black/Chrome Silver                                                          
                         Stand Type: Branch Floor Stand (Silver)                                             
                                                                                              Page 108 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Video, Smart Hub                                                                    
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Spesification :                                                           
                         Screen Size: min. 104.6" Measured Diagonally                                        
                         Resolution: approx 5120 x 2160                                                      
                         Audio: Dolby MS11                                                                   
                         Sound Output (RMS): 160W (40Wx2, Woofer 40W, Tweeter 40W)                           
                         Speaker Type: Front Firing                                                          
                         Wireless Connectivity: Wi‐Fi Connectivity                                           
                         Processor: Quad Core Plus                                                           
                         Apps Platform: Smart TV with Apps, S‐Recommendation and Full Web                    
                         Browser                                                                             
                         Interface :: Wi‐Fi Direct, Game Mode, One Connect Box, Eco Sensor                   
                         Inputs & Outputs :HDMI Connections 4, SB: 4,Ethernet (LAN):                         
                         1,Component: 1                                                                      
                         Composite In (AV): 2 (1Common Use for Component Y)                                  
                         Power Supply (V): AC110‐120V 60Hz                                                   
                         Typical Power Consumption: 440W                                                     
                         Maximum Power Consumption: 819W                                                     
                         Standby Power Consumption: 0.3W                                                     
                         System                                                                              
                         DTV Tuner: ATSC / Clear QAM                                                         
                         Supplied includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐179 Dialogue Noise Suppression Feature :                                                              
                         Audio DNS 2 Two‐Channel Dialogue Noise Suppressor                                   
                         DNS algorithm, together with the unique learn function that calculates              
                         the noise content within a signal and determines optimum parameters                 
                         to attenuate the noise, while maintaining the wanted signal. eliminate              
                         traffic noise, air conditioning, wind, rain, babble, and general                    
                         background noise from audio signals in real‐time applications.                      
                         Technical Spesification :                                                           
                         Number of Channels : min 2 x                                                        
                         Analogue Audio                                                                      
                         Mic/Line Inputs : min.2 x Balanced XLR3F                                            
                         Line Output : min. 2 x Balanced XLR3M                                               
                                                                                              Page 109 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Output Signal Level : min +4 dBu Nominal                                            
                         Maximum Output : approx +24 dBu                                                     
                         AD/DA 24‐Bit Linear PCM                                                             
                         Sample Rate Internal Sync: min. 48 kHz                                              
                         External Sync: approx. 40 kHz to 100 kHz                                            
                         Phantom Power for Mic Inputs : min. 48V ±4 V, 10 mA per Mic                         
                         Digital Audio                                                                       
                         Digital Input :min. 1 x AES3 or AES11 via Balanced XLR3F                            
                         Output : min. 1 x AES3 via Balanced XLR3M                                           
                         Internal Sync: min. 48 kHz                                                          
                         Processing                                                                          
                         Resolution : min. 40‐Bit, Floating‐Point                                            
                         Latency : min. <0.1 ms                                                              
                         Power                                                                               
                         Input 8 to 17.5 VDC on XLR4M                                                        
                         Adapter Specification Input: 85 to 250 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz                             
                         Output: 12 VDC, 1 A (Max)                                                           
                         Dimensions : approx 6.5 x 4.3 x 1.7" / 16.4 x 11.0 x 4.4 cm                         
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         XLR Cable                                                                           
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training                         
 L02‐2‐180 Forensic Workstations Supported CPU                                                               
                         CPU Socket: TypeIntel Socket 3647                                                   
                         CPU TypeDual: Intel Processor Xeon Silver                                           
                         Processor Number: Silver 4216                                                       
                         Number of Cores / Threads: 16 / 32                                                  
                         CPU Speed: 2.1 GHz / 3.2 GHz Turbo                                                  
                         QPI: 8GT/s                                                                          
                         Cache: 22 MB L3                                                                     
                         Lithography: 14nm                                                                   
                         Heatsink: Premium Grade Quiet Air Cooling Solutions                                 
                         Chipset                                                                             
                         Chipset: Intel C621e                                                                
                         Memory                                                                              
                         Slots: 12x DIMM                                                                     
                         Speed: DDR4‐2666                                                                    
                         Memory: Installed128 GB (4 x 32 GB) ECC                                             
                         Maximum Memory: 768GB                                                               
                         Channel Supported: Quad Channel                                                     
                         Expansion Slots: PCIe 3.0 x167                                                      
                         Video Card                                                                          
                                                                                              Page 110 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ChipsetNVIDIA                                                                       
                         GPU: RTX 3060                                                                       
                         Memory: 12GB GDDR6                                                                  
                         Video Ports: 1x HDMI 2.1, 3x DP 1.4a                                                
                         Storage Devices                                                                     
                         SATA: 6Gb/s10                                                                       
                         M.2: 32Gb/s1                                                                        
                         RAID Controller                                                                     
                         LSI PCIe RAID Controller: 8 Channel SATA/SAS 6Gb/s                                  
                         Storage Configuration                                                               
                         OS Drive: 1TB M.2 32Gb/s                                                            
                         Temp Drive: 2 x 1 TB SATA 6Gbp/s SSD’s (RAID0)                                      
                         Cache Drive: 2 x 1 TB SATA 6Gbp/s SSD’s (RAID0)                                     
                         Active Evidence Drive: 2 x 1 TB SATA 6Gbp/s SSD’s (RAID0)                           
                         Data Drive: 4TB 7200RPM SATA 6Gb/s HDD                                              
                         Storage RAID: 4x 4TB 7200RPM SATA 6Gb/s HDD's (RAID5)                               
                         On‐Board Audio                                                                      
                         Audio Chipset: 8 Channel Realtek ALC888 High Definition Audio CODEC                 
                         On‐Board LAN                                                                        
                         LAN Chipset: 2x Intel I210‐AT                                                       
                         Max LAN Speed: 10/100/1000Mbps                                                      
                         Rear I/O Ports                                                                      
                         PS/2: 1                                                                             
                         RJ45: 2                                                                             
                         USB 2.0: 2                                                                          
                         USB 3.1 Gen : 4                                                                     
                         USB 3.1 Gen 2: 1x Type‐A / 1x Type‐C                                                
                         S/PDIF Out: 1x Optical                                                              
                         Audio Ports: 8‐Channel Audio I/O                                                    
                         Front I/O Ports                                                                     
                         USB 3.0: 11 (2 Top Mounted, 9 Front Mounted)                                        
                         USB 3.1: 2x USB 3.1 Gen2 Type‐C (1 Top Mounted, 1 Front Mounted)                    
                         eSATA: 1x 6Gb/s eSATA                                                               
                         Audio: 1x Headphone, 1x Microphone                                                  
                         Front Mounted 5.25" Bays                                                            
                         Optical Disk Drive: 16x Blu‐Ray Burner                                              
                         SSD Drive Bay: 6x 2.5" SATA Trayless                                                
                         Data Drive Bay: 1x 3.5" SATA Trayless                                               
                         USB 3.0 Hub: 8 Ports                                                                
                         USB 3.0/3.1 Hub: 1x Gen2 Type‐C, 2x Gen1 Type‐A                                     
                         Hot‐Swap Bay: 3x 3.5" SATA Trayless                                                 
                         RAID Bay: 4x 3.5" SATA Trayless                                                     
                         Features                                                                            
                         On‐Board Power Button: Yes                                                          
                                                                                              Page 111 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         On‐Board Reset Button: Yes                                                          
                         On‐Board CMOS Clear: Yes                                                            
                         On‐Board Diagnostic LED: Yes                                                        
                         Operating System                                                                    
                         Microsoft Windows 10: Professional 64‐Bit                                           
                         Power Supply                                                                        
                         Maximum Wattage: 1300 Watts                                                         
                         80 Plus Certification: 80 Plus Gold Certified                                       
                         Modular: Fully Modular                                                              
                         System Dimensions                                                                   
                         Peripherals Includding:                                                             
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Monitor: 2x 27" LED Monitors (1920x1080)                                            
                         Keyboard and Mouse: Wired or Wireless Combo                                         
                         Tool Kit: Multi‐Piece Toolkit to assist in Digital Evidence Gathering               
                         ‐ Opration and maintenence books in English or Bahasa Indonesia ( if                
                         available)                                                                          
                         ‐ Transport to location instalation commessioning and trial run,                    
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐181 Transcription Software Feature :                                                                  
                         Streamline transcription :Auto‐Transcribe Folder Agent (ATFA) manages               
                         the flow of transcribed text and synchronized audio of digital voice                
                         recordings to streamline third‐party review and correction.                         
                         Gain efficiencies : Support staff can review a draft of a transcribed               
                         document instead of typing the whole document from scratch for                      
                         faster, more efficient turnaround.                                                  
                         Increase productivity : Use a digital voice recorder or anywhere                    
                         professional‐grade mobile dictation solution, and dictate reports, notes            
                         or memos away from your desk or out in the field for later transcription            
                         using                                                                               
 L02‐2‐182 Sound Booth   Feature :                                                                           
                         Ventilation system, door windows, acooustic studio foam, remote                     
                         switch.                                                                             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Exterior Dimensions                                                                 
                         Height: approx. 216 cm                                                              
                         Dimension: approx.1:112 cm                                                          
                         Dimension: approx. 2:81 cm                                                          
                         Interior Dimensions                                                                 
                                                                                              Page 112 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Height:approx. 203 cm                                                               
                         Dimension approx 1:90 cm                                                            
                         Dimension approx 2:60 cm                                                            
                         Assembly Weight                                                                     
                         Weight: apporx. 365 kg                                                              
                         Wall Construction                                                                   
                         Thickness:                                                                          
                         Total Thickness: approx. 13.34 cm                                                   
                         MDF Barrier: approx. 2.54 cm                                                        
                         Air/Foam: approx. 3.18 cm                                                           
                         MDF Barrier: approx. 2.54 cm                                                        
                         Detachable Foam: approx. 5.08 cm                                                    
                         Weight: approx. 31.80 kg/sq. mtr.                                                   
                         Door Window Design                                                                  
                         Thickness:                                                                          
                         Total Thickness: approx. 7.94 cm                                                    
                         Laminated Safety Glass: approx. 6.35 mm                                             
                         Air: approx. 6.35 mm                                                                
                         Laminated Safety Glass: approx 6.35 mm                                              
                         Laminated Safety Glass: approx 4.13 cm                                              
                         Laminated Safety Glass: approx 6.35 mm                                              
                         Air: approx 6.35 mm                                                                 
                         Laminated Safety Glass: approx6.35 mm                                               
                         Size: approx 30.48 cm x 76.20 cm                                                    
                         Supplied Includding:                                                                
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐183 Camera DSLR Body Only Features:                                                                   
                         ‐ With anti dust system                                                             
                         ‐ With Dynamic Range Function                                                       
                         ‐ With Slow & Quick Motion recording                                                
                         ‐ With Shoot Scene Slection: Portrair, Sports Action, Macro, Landscape,             
                         Sunset, Night Scene, Night Portrait                                                 
                         ‐ With Noise Reduction                                                              
                         ‐ With Image Stabilizer                                                             
                         ‐ With Playback mode                                                                
                         ‐ With PC Interface                                                                 
                         ‐ With built in Microphone and Speaker                                              
                         ‐ With AF‐ON button and multi selector                                              
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                                                                                              Page 113 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ Model : Full Frame Digital SLR                                                    
                         ‐ Resolution : approx. Min. 24 megapixels                                           
                         ‐ Sensor : High‐sensitivity, high‐resolution, 35mm full frame, CMOS                 
                         sensor                                                                              
                         ‐ Picture Format & Size : JPEG, RAW, 3:2 max. ~24 M, 16:9 max.~20 M,                
                         Panorama image                                                                      
                         ‐ Picture Effect : min. 8 types: Posterization (Color), Posterization               
                         (B/W), Pop Color,                                                                   
                         Retro Photo, Partial Color (R/G/B/Y), High Contrast Monochrome,                     
                         Toy Camera (Normal/Cool/Warm/Green/Magenta), Soft High‐key ,                        
                         Rich‐tone Monochrome                                                                
                         ‐ Creative Style : min. Standard, Vivid, Neutral, Clear, Deep, Light,               
                         Portrait, Landscape,                                                                
                         Sunset, Night Scene, Autumn leaves, Black & White, Sepia,                           
                         Style Box, Contrast, Saturation, Sharpness                                          
                         ‐ Video Recording : min. Full HD                                                    
                         ‐ Video Format : XAVC S, AVCHD                                                      
                         ‐ Lens Mount : E mount                                                              
                         ‐ Focus Type : Fast Hybrid AF (phase‐detection AF/contrast‐detection                
                         AF)                                                                                 
                         ‐ Focus Sensor : CMOS                                                               
                         ‐ Focus Mode : AF‐A (Automatic AF), AF‐S (Single‐shot AF), AF‐C                     
                         (Continuous AF),                                                                    
                         DMF (Direct Manual Focus), Manual Focus                                             
                         ‐ Metering System : Real‐time Evaluative metering with the image                    
                         sensor                                                                              
                         ‐ ISO Sensitivity : Still images: ISO 100‐51200, AUTO (ISO 100‐12800),              
                         Movies: ISO 100‐51200, AUTO (ISO 100‐12800)                                         
                         ‐ White Balance : Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent /                 
                         Fluorescent /                                                                       
                         Warm White / Cool White / Day White / Daylight / Flash / Underwater /               
                         Color Temperature 2500 to 9900K & color filter G7 to M7 (57‐step),                  
                         A7 to B7 (29‐step) / Custom                                                         
                         ‐ Viewfinder : Electronic viewfinder (color), XGA Oled, approx. min.                
                         2.350.000 dots                                                                      
                         ‐ Shutter Type : Electronically‐controlled, vertical‐traverse, focal‐plane          
                         type                                                                                
                         ‐ LCD Screen : TFT color, liquid‐crystal monitor, approx. min. 3 inch,              
                         approx. min. 920.000 dots                                                           
                         ‐ Media Storage : min. SDXC Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards,                        
                         MicroSD, MicroSDHX,                                                                 
                         MicroSDXC, Memoro Stick PRO Duo                                                     
                         ‐ Power : Battery                                                                   
                                                                                              Page 114 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         ‐ 1x Rechargeable Battery                                                           
                         ‐ 1x Body Cap                                                                       
                         ‐ 1x Shoulder Strap                                                                 
                         ‐ Power Cords                                                                       
                         ‐ 1x AC Adapter                                                                     
                         ‐ Charger for Battery Pack                                                          
                         ‐ 1x Micro‐USB Cable                                                                
                         ‐ Software                                                                          
                         ‐ Standard Accessories                                                              
                         ‐ Operation and Maintenance Manual book in English                                  
                         ‐ Transport to Location, Commissioning, Trial Run and Initial Usage                 
                         Training, warranty manufacture                                                      
 L02‐2‐184 Lens          Have to be Compatible with offered Cameras                                          
                         Features:                                                                           
                         ‐ Wide‐angle to normal‐length zoom that features a fast                             
                         ‐ Bright constant f/1.8 maximum aperture                                            
                         ‐ Use with APS‐C‐sized sensors and provides a 35mm‐equivalent focal                 
                         length range of 28.8‐56mm.                                                          
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         ‐ Aperture Range: f/1.8‐16                                                          
                         ‐ Fast Constant Maximum Aperture                                                    
                         ‐ Designed for APS‐C‐Sized Sensors                                                  
                         ‐ 35mm Equivalent Focal Length: 28.8‐56mm                                           
                         ‐ Hyper Sonic AF Motor                                                              
                         ‐ Internal Focusing and Zoom Design                                                 
                         ‐ Four Aspherical and 5 SLD Glass Elements                                          
                         ‐ Super Multi‐Layer Coating                                                         
                         ‐ EF Lens Mount                                                                     
                         ‐ Compatible with Sigma USB Dock                                                    
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Accessories                                                            
                         ‐ Lens cap Snap‐on                                                                  
                         ‐ Lens hood                                                                         
                         ‐ Lens case                                                                         
                         ‐ Flexible lens pouch                                                               
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐185 LED light Photo Equipment Features:                                                               
                         ‐ Color: 2800‐6500K, CRI/TLCI: 96/97                                                
                         ‐ Dimming: 0‐100%, Includes Reflector                                               
                         ‐ 2.4 GHz Wireless Control                                                          
                         ‐ 32 Channels, 16 Groups, Optional Remote                                           
                                                                                              Page 115 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Item Type: LED Monolight                                                            
                         Included Light Modifier: Reflector                                                  
                         Color Temperature: min. approx. 2800 to 6500K +/‐ 200K                              
                         Color Accuracy Standard CRI: 96                                                     
                         TLCI: 97                                                                            
                         Cooling System: Fan                                                                 
                         Dimming: Yes, Built‐In Dimmer                                                       
                         0 to 100%                                                                           
                         Umbrella Mount: Yes                                                                 
                         Front Accessory Mount Proprietary                                                   
                         Connectivity                                                                        
                         Wireless Remote Control Type Unspecified Type                                       
                         Wireless Channels: min. 32                                                          
                         Wireless Groups: min. 16                                                            
                         Wireless Range: min. approx. 30 m                                                   
                         Inputs/Outputs: 1 x Barrel / Coax Power Input (16.8 VDC)                            
                         Battery Plate Type: L‐Series / NP‐F (Included)                                      
                         Battery: 2 x Rechargeable                                                           
                         Included Adapter / Cable 1 x Edison Plug to Barrel / Coax AC to DC                  
                         Adapter                                                                             
                         1 x Barrel / Coax to Barrel / Coax Cable (4' / 1.5 m)                               
                         1 x Barrel / Coax to Barrel / Coax Cable (0.7' / 0.2 m)                             
                         Power Consumption: 60 W                                                             
                         Fixture Mounting: min.1 x 1/4"‐20 Female Thread                                     
                         Included Adapter: min. 1 x Swivel Mount: 5/8" Receiver to 1/4"‐20                   
                         Male Screw                                                                          
                         Supplied Incliuding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐186 Calibration card Features:                                                                        
                         Perfect for gray or white balancing                                                 
                         Real color management of (almost) any camera in (almost) any light                  
                         Contain of 3 patches,                                                               
                         No metameric effects                                                                
                         Colors are extremely fade resistant                                                 
                         White, neutral mid grey and black patches                                           
                         • Self adhesive surface                                                             
                         • Fade resistant                                                                    
                         • Scale reference (mm)                                                              
                                                                                              Page 116 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         • White patch is free from fluorescent pigments                                     
                                                                                                             
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         Dimension : approx. 142 x 40 mm                                                     
                         white white (Lab 95*0*0), mid gray (48*0*0) and dark gray (35*0*0)                  
                         Grey patch reflects 18% of the light                                                
                         Supplied Incliuding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐187 Dry Cabinet   Features:                                                                           
                         dehumidifier systems                                                                
                         digital LED displays                                                                
                         double magnetic door with lock                                                      
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Number of partitions: min. 6                                                        
                         Number of compartments/rooms: min. 7                                                
                         Capacity: min. 180 liter                                                            
                         Gross weight: approx. 30kg                                                          
                         Power consumption: less than 15Watts                                                
                         Voltage: AC 100‐240V/ DC 5V 5A                                                      
                         Volume Capacity: 180Liters                                                          
                         Material: thick cold‐rolled steel                                                   
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         ‐ Components Operation and Maintenance Manual book in English                       
                         ‐ Supplied Incliuding:                                                              
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐188 Wireless Microphone Features:                                                                     
                         ‐Portable Audio Recorder                                                            
                         ‐Uses a system of interchangeable microphone capsules                               
                         ‐Includes detachable X/Y capsule (XYH‐5)                                            
                         ‐Compatible with all Zoom input capsules                                            
                         ‐Recording format: WAV (BWF compatible) and MP3                                     
                         ‐4‐track simultaneous recording                                                     
                         ‐Large backlit LCD display                                                          
                                                                                              Page 117 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         DirectionalSensitivity: approx. –45 dB, 1 kHz at 1                                  
                         PaInput Gain: approx. –∞ to 52 dB                                                   
                         Maximum Sound Pressure Input: approx. 140 dB SPL[MIC/LINE IN]                       
                         Connector: apprix. 1/8"                                                             
                         stereo mini jackInput Gain: approx –∞ to 52 dB                                      
                         Input Impedance: approx. 2 kΩ or more                                               
                         Plug‐in Power: 2.5V supported                                                       
                         Built‐in Speaker: min. approx. 400 mW/8 Ω mono speaker                              
                         Sampling Frequency: approx. 44.1/48kHz                                              
                         Bit Rate: 16 bit                                                                    
                         Recording Time:approx. 03:08:00 (44.1kHz/16‐bit WAV)34:43:00                        
                         (128kbps MP3)                                                                       
                         Display: LCD (128 x 64 pixels) with backlight                                       
                         Battery Life : approx. 15 hours                                                     
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         ‐ Supplied Incliuding:                                                              
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training, warranty               
                         manufacture                                                                         
 L02‐2‐189 Software for video editing Unlimited access to CyberLink premium plug‐ins & effects. More added   
                         monthly! ‐                                                                          
                         Always up‐to‐date with the latest features and version updates. Learn               
                         more > ‐                                                                            
                         Unlimited access to background music and sound clips. More added                    
                         monthly! ‐                                                                          
                         Access to Shutterstock stock video clips ‐                                          
                         Access to Shutterstock stock background music ‐                                     
                         Access to Shutterstock stock photos & images ‐                                      
                         Access to Getty Images stock video Clips ‐                                          
                         Access to Getty Images stock photos ‐                                               
                         Priority Customer Support ‐                                                         
                         Unlimited access to marketing video templates for promos and                        
                         ads. New templates added monthly! Learn More! ‐                                     
                         Included Applications                                                               
                         PowerDirector 21 Ultimate                                                           
                         PhotoDirector 14 Ultra ($74.99) ‐                                                   
                         AudioDirector 13 ($96.99) ‐                                                         
                         ColorDirector 11 ($51.99) ‐                                                         
                         Cloud storage 25GB/1 year                                                           
                                                                                              Page 118 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Editing Features & Format                                                           
                         Intuitive editing tools (e.g. distortion correction, color match, title and         
                         theme designer etc)                                                                 
                         Advanced features (e.g. AI‐powered tools, selection mask (vertex),                  
                         shape designer etc)                                                                 
                         Professional format video import: HEVC HDR10 & HLG, ProRes 4:2:2,                   
                         and video files import MXF AVC 4:2:0                                                
                         PowerDirector 21                                                                    
                         UltimateAd Designer (create marketing videos in 3‐easy steps using                  
                         pre‐crafted templates for any type of promotion) ‐                                  
                         Premium Plug‐ins & Effects                                                          
                         Premium plug‐ins & effects 8 packs                                                  
                         Background music & sound clips 50 tracks & 100 clips                                
                         3rd Party plug‐ins & effects 2 packs                                                
                         Supplied Incliuding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐190 Screen reader software JAWS Professional                                                          
                         Two multi‐lingual synthesizers: Eloquence and Vocalizer Expressive                  
                         Talking installation                                                                
                         Built‐in free DAISY Player and full set of DAISY‐formatted basic training           
                         books                                                                               
                         Works with Microsoft Office, Internet Explorer, Firefox, and much more              
                         Supports Windows 8.1 and Windows 10, including touch screens and                    
                         gestures                                                                            
                         Support for MathML content presented in Internet Explorer that is                   
                         rendered with MathJax                                                               
                         Fast information look‐up at your fingertips with Research It                        
                         Convenient OCR feature provides access to the text of PDF documents,                
                         even those with scanned images that are reported as empty                           
                         documents by screen readers                                                         
                         Save time with Skim Reading                                                         
                         The only Windows screen reader to provide contracted Braille input                  
                         from your Braille keyboard                                                          
                         Fully compatible with MAGic, screen magnification software, and                     
                         OpenBook, scanning and reading program                                              
                         ADVANCED FEATURES                                                                   
                         JAWS Tandem available for free to help with support and training                    
                         Optional support for Citrix, Terminal Services, and Remote Desktop                  
                                                                                              Page 119 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Powerful scripting language to customize the user experience on any                 
                         application                                                                         
                         Includes drivers for all popular Braille displays                                   
                         Includes voices for over 30 different languages                                     
                         Supplied Incliuding:                                                                
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐191 Braille machine Features:                                                                         
                         25 characters/second Quality single‐sided braille                                   
                         High‐resolution tactile graphics                                                    
                         Multiple paper options                                                              
                         Portable personal embosse                                                           
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Embossing                                                                           
                         Print Speed: min. up to 25 CPS                                                      
                         Printing Mode: Single‐sided                                                         
                         Tactile Resolution: min. 17 DPI                                                     
                         Tactile Graphic Dot Heights: Variable for color representation                      
                         Braille Dot Heights:min. djustable in 3 heights                                     
                         Paper                                                                               
                         Paper Width: min. approx. 77 up to 216 mm                                           
                         Paper: Continuous, single‐sheet feeder                                              
                         Paper Weight: min. approx. 50‐175 gsm                                               
                         Connection/Compatibility                                                            
                         Connection: USB (1.1, 2.0)                                                          
                         Compatibility: Windows 7, 8/8.1, 10                                                 
                         Temperature/Humidity                                                                
                         Recommended Temperature: 41 – 95 °F (5 – 35 °C)                                     
                         Humidity: 20 – 80% RH (non‐condensing)                                              
                         Power Supply                                                                        
                         100 – 120V, 220 – 240V                                                              
                         50/60 Hz (+/‐ 3%)                                                                   
                         Standby: <4 W Stamping operation: <85 W                                             
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                                                                                              Page 120 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐192 Assistive keyboard Features:                                                                      
                         QWERTY or ABC layout                                                                
                         Punctuation Keys                                                                    
                         F1 ‐ F10 keys                                                                       
                         Assist mode                                                                         
                         Run‐on" eliminated                                                                  
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Full‐size keyboard: approx. 17.8cm x 48.3cm (7 × 19 inches)                         
                         60 oversized keys: every key on the BigKeys LX keyboard is extra large:             
                         2.5cm square                                                                        
                         Extra‐long, non‐coiled cable                                                        
                         BigKeys LX now comes with a native USB connector                                    
                         Top quality click‐style key switches, tested to over 10 million keystrokes          
                         High‐impact injection‐moulded ABS case and keycaps                                  
                         Wear‐resistant UV coated keycap printing                                            
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐193 Assistive computer Features:                                                                      
                         Setup by Assistive Technology                                                       
                         Tech specs                                                                          
                         Processor: 11th Gen Intel® Core™ i7‐11370H processor                                
                                                                                                             
                         Graphics: NVIDIA® GeForce RTX® 3060 Laptop GPU with 6GB GDDR6                       
                         GPU memory                                                                          
                         Memory and Storage: 32GB (DDR4) ; 1TB solid‐state drive (SSD)                       
                         Display                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         Screen: 28” PixelSense™ Display                                                     
                         Touch: 10‐point multi‐touch                                                         
                                                                                              Page 121 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Aspect Ratio: 3:2                                                                   
                         Resolution: 4500 x 3000 (192 PPI)                                                   
                         Color profile: sRGB and Vivid                                                       
                         Individually color‐calibrated display                                               
                         1 billion colors, improved color accuracy and better gradients with Auto            
                         Color Management                                                                    
                         Contrast ratio 1200:1                                                               
                         Dolby Vision® support4                                                              
                         Gorilla® Glass 3                                                                    
                         Size and Weight                                                                     
                         Security                                                                            
                         TPM 2.0 chip is a security processor that is designed to give you peace             
                         of mind.                                                                            
                         Windows Hello face sign‐in.                                                         
                         Video/Cameras                                                                       
                         Front Facing Windows Hello face authentication camera                               
                         1080p Full HD front facing camera                                                   
                         Audio                                                                               
                         Stereo 2.1 speakers with Dolby® Atmos™5                                             
                         Mics                                                                                
                         Dual far field studio microphones                                                   
                                                                                                             
                         Connections                                                                         
                         3 x USB‐C® with USB 4.0/Thunderbolt™ 4                                              
                         Native external display support: Up to three 4K UHD @60Hz                           
                         2 x USB‐A 3.1                                                                       
                         3.5 mm headphone jack                                                               
                         1 Gigabit Ethernet port                                                             
                         Network and connectivity                                                            
                         Wi‐Fi 6: 802.11ax compatible                                                        
                         Bluetooth® Wireless 5.1 technology                                                  
                         Pen and accessories compatibility                                                   
                         Designed for Surface Pen                                                            
                         Integrated magnetic storage with Surface Pen                                        
                         Supports Microsoft Pen Protocol (MPP)                                               
                         Compatible with Surface Dial* on‐screen interaction. In‐box accessories             
                         come pre‐paired.                                                                    
                         Software                                                                            
                                                                                              Page 122 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         Windows 11 Pro                                                                      
                         Preloaded Microsoft 365 Apps9                                                       
                         Microsoft 365 Business Standard, Microsoft 365 Business Premium, or                 
                         Microsoft 365 Apps 30‐day trial6                                                    
                         Accessibility                                                                       
                         Compatible with Surface Adaptive Kit                                                
                         Compatible with Microsoft Adaptive Accessories                                      
                         Include Windows Accessibility Feature – Learn More Accessibility                    
                         Features | Microsoft Accessibility                                                  
                         Discover more Microsoft Accessible Devices & Products Accessible                    
                         Devices & Products for PC & Gaming | Assistive Tech Accessories ‐                   
                         Microsoft Store                                                                     
                         Sustainability                                                                      
                         Meets ENERGY STAR® requirements12                                                   
                         Exterior                                                                            
                         Physical buttons: Volume, Power                                                     
                         Zero Gravity Hinge                                                                  
                         Sensors                                                                             
                         Ambient light sensor                                                                
                                                                                                             
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Surface Studio 2+                                                                   
                         Surface Pen                                                                         
                         Surface Keyboard                                                                    
                         Surface Mouse                                                                       
                         Power cord with grip‐release cable                                                  
                         Quick Start Guide                                                                   
                         Safety and warranty guide                                                           
                         Keyboard Compatability                                                              
                         Activation: Moving keys                                                             
                         Layout: QWERTY, full row of function keys (F1 – F12)                                
                         Windows key and dedicated buttons for media controls, screen                        
                         brightness                                                                          
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                              Page 123 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐194 Assistive customised laptop Features                                                              
         with JAWS       Two multi‐lingual synthesizers: Eloquence and Vocalizer Expressive                  
                         Talking installation (n/a with this bundle as it will be setup before               
                         arrival)                                                                            
                         Built‐in free DAISY Player and full set of DAISY‐formatted basic training           
                         books                                                                               
                         Works with Microsoft Office, Internet Explorer, Firefox, and much more              
                         Supports Windows® 8.1 and Windows 10, including touch screens and                   
                         gestures                                                                            
                         Support for MathML content presented in Internet Explorer that is                   
                         rendered with MathJax                                                               
                         Fast information look‐up at your fingertips with Research It                        
                         Convenient OCR feature provides access to the text of PDF documents,                
                         even those with scanned images that are reported as empty                           
                         documents by screen readers                                                         
                         Save time with Skim Reading                                                         
                         The only Windows screen reader to provide contracted Braille input                  
                         from your Braille keyboard                                                          
                         Fully compatible with MAGic, screen magnification software, and                     
                         OpenBook, scanning and reading program                                              
                         JAWS Tandem available for free to help with support and training                    
                         Optional support for Citrix, Terminal Services, and Remote Desktop                  
                         Powerful scripting language to customize the user experience on any                 
                         application                                                                         
                         Includes drivers for all popular Braille displays                                   
                         Includes voices for over 30 different languages                                     
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         JAWS for Windows Turnkey Laptop                                                     
                         Processor: min. Core™ i5 Processor                                                  
                         Operating System: Windows 10 Home                                                   
                         Memory: min.12 GB                                                                   
                         Hard Drive: min. 256 GB                                                             
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐195 Assistive mouse Roller Features:                                                                  
                         Two additional sockets for switches.                                                
                         Provides a natural hand rest for comfort.                                           
                         Color‐coded buttons mounted sub‐flush to prevent accidental                         
                         operation.                                                                          
                                                                                              Page 124 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Left/right and drag lock buttons.                                                   
                         Trackball sockets to operate left/right click buttons from remote                   
                         switches.                                                                           
                         Easy 'plug and play' installation and auto detecting PS2 and USB                    
                         protocols.                                                                          
                         PC and Mac compatible                                                               
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         operating range : approx. 32 feet                                                   
                         Height approx. 3.25 in                                                              
                         Width approx. 5.5 in                                                                
                         Length approx. 12 in                                                                
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐196 Assistive mouse ( wireless Features:                                                              
         head controlled mouse) Origin Instruments Quality and Support, Compatibility,                       
                         The HeadMouse Nano emulates a standard USB computer mouse. It                       
                         will work with any device that can use a regular USB mouse.                         
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         Wireless Head Controlled Access                                                     
                         HeadMouse Nano                                                                      
                         Universal Mount                                                                     
                         Extra Dual‐lock                                                                     
                         Right‐angle 6.5‐foot and straight 2‐foot USB cables (USB 2.0 Type A to              
                         Micro‐B)                                                                            
                         50 target dots                                                                      
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐197 Assistive vision Features:                                                                        
                         Smart Reading                                                                       
                         Read Text                                                                           
                         Easy‐to‐Use                                                                         
                         Works Everywhere                                                                    
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                                                                                              Page 125 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Dimensions: approx. 76 x 21 x 14.9 mm                                               
                         Weight: Device: approx. 22.5 gr                                                     
                         Device+Box: approx. 553 gr/                                                         
                         Battery: approx. 3.7V DC, nominal approx. 320mAH                                    
                         Camera: min. approx. 13 megapixels                                                  
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐198 Voice amplifier Features:                                                                         
                         smaller voice amplifier                                                             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Size: approx. 7.6 x 7.6 x 3.8 cm                                                    
                         Weight: approx. 0.19 kg                                                             
                         Weight: 7approx. 0.22 kg ‐ with batteries inserted                                  
                         Microphones                                                                         
                         Headset with Boom Microphone                                                        
                         EarHook Microphone                                                                  
                         PA 400 Collar Microphone                                                            
                         Lapel (Lavalier) Microphone                                                         
                         Supply Including:                                                                   
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ReChargeable Batteries                                                              
                         Necklace Lanyard                                                                    
                         100 ‐ 240V Charger                                                                  
                         Carrying Case                                                                       
                         Belt Clip                                                                           
                         Headset Boom Microphone                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐199 Personal amplifier Features:                                                                      
                         Tone control                                                                        
                         Balance control between left and right ear                                          
                         Omnidirectional internal microphone                                                 
                         Omnidirectional plug‐in microphone for enhanced sound pick‐up                       
                         Functions as t‐coil receiver in looped environments                                 
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                                                                                              Page 126 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         material: ABS/Polycarbonate molded plastic case.                                    
                         Battery Type: Two AAA size                                                          
                         Battery Life: approx. up to 105 hours                                               
                         Approvals: CE (Note 1), RoHS2 (Note 2), FCC, IC, WEEE (Note 3)                      
                         Power output: approx. 52 mW (max) into 32 ohms (Stereo)                             
                         Distortion: approx. 1% THD (max)                                                    
                         Max gain: approx. 63 dB @ 2.5 kHz (Tone=High)                                       
                         Tone Control at high position: approx. 2.7dB boost at 5 kHz, 6.7dB cut              
                         at 400 Hz.                                                                          
                         Tone Control at mid position: approx. 0.6dB cut at 5 kHz, 2.9dB cut at              
                         400 Hz.                                                                             
                         Tone Control at low position: approx. 2.0dB cut at 5 kHz, 3.0dB boost at            
                         400 Hz                                                                              
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐200 Talking Digital Voice Recorder Features:                                                          
                         Specialized Voice Guide in English language, which allows very easy                 
                         control for visually impaired users.                                                
                         Recording in very high quality MP3 and WAV                                          
                         Big buttons for easy operation                                                      
                         Sensitive microphones with low noise                                                
                         Long battery life with 2x AAA battery                                               
                         Automatic gain control                                                              
                         FM radio with automatic tuning and manual presets, including stereo                 
                         recording                                                                           
                         Timer recording and timer playback at any time (also repeatedly)                    
                         One‐touch start of recording                                                        
                         Edit of the recorded file (split, rewrite, append)                                  
                         Voice description of the recorded file                                              
                         Suitable for audio books and music files. Spelling the names of files and           
                         including resume function.                                                          
                         Automatic divide of long files                                                      
                         Endless recording while powering from USB                                           
                         Protection of files against delete by mistake + recovery function for               
                         mistakenly deleted files                                                            
                         Hearing aid for on‐the‐fly check of the recording.                                  
                         Recording activated by voice                                                        
                         Adjustable speed of playback without changing the pitch.                            
                         Bookmarks for easy way to find some position in recording                           
                         Copy and move files from internal memory to SD card and between                     
                                                                                              Page 127 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         folders                                                                             
                         Easy switch for choose of wide space recording or directional recording             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Memory Capacity : 12 GB                                                             
                                                                                                             
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐201 Assistive Braille display Features and Spec:                                                      
                         ALVA BC640                                                                          
                         40 Braille cells: for reading                                                       
                         One piece cell cap                                                                  
                         40 cursor routing keys positioned below the Braille line                            
                         Smartpad with 5‐way navigation key and 4 function keys                              
                         Possibility to include your preferred screen reader on‐board                        
                         Integrated high range Bluetooth technology (within a range of 100                   
                         meters)                                                                             
                         Integrated rechargeable battery: offering 10 hours continuous use                   
                         Technical Specification:                                                            
                         navigation thumb : min. 5 keys                                                      
                         navigation : min. 4 keys                                                            
                         integrated memory :min. 4 GB                                                        
                         High speed USB port                                                                 
                         Dimensions: approx. 33.8 x 7.5 x 1.8 cm                                             
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐202 Scanner       Features:                                                                           
                         Connection with various documents                                                   
                         Smooth dual scanner operation                                                       
                         Scan A3 and tabloid / ledger sized documents                                        
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Type: Flatbed scanners for desktops                                                 
                         Document Scan Size                                                                  
                         Wide: approx. 297.4mm                                                               
                         Long: approx. 431.8mm                                                               
                                                                                              Page 128 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Scan sensors: CCD                                                                   
                         Source of Light: LEDs                                                               
                         Scan side: Simplex                                                                  
                         Scan mode: Black and White, Error Diffusion, 256‐level Grayscale,                   
                         Advanced Text Enhancement II, 24‐bit Color                                          
                         Scan Resolution: approx. 100 x 100dpi / 150 x 150dpi / 200 x 200dpi /               
                         240 x 240dpi / 300 x 300dpi / 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi                           
                         Noise: Not more than 59dB                                                           
                         Interface: High Speed USB 2.0                                                       
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐203 Printer       Features:                                                                           
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Print speed                                                                         
                         Colour: min. approx. 35 ppm                                                         
                         Black: min. approx. up to 35 ppm                                                    
                         Standard functions: Copy, Email, Fax, Print, Scan                                   
                         Duty cycle:min. approx. up to 85,000 images/month                                   
                         Document handler: Single‐pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder                      
                         Capacity: min. 50 sheets                                                            
                         First‐page‐out time, printing As fast as 8.2 seconds black and white /              
                         9.8 seconds colour                                                                  
                         Maximum print resolution: min. approx. 600 x 600 x 8 dpi                            
                         Processor: min. 1.05 GHz                                                            
                         Print memory : min 2 GB /                                                           
                         Connectivity: Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base‐T, High‐speed USB 3.0, NFC                  
                         Tap‐to‐Pair                                                                         
                         Connectivity (optional): Wi‐Fi 802.11n and Wi‐Fi Direct with optional               
                         Wi‐Fi Kit                                                                           
                         Copy                                                                                
                         First‐page‐out time, copying As fast as 8.8 seconds black and white /               
                         10.6 seconds colour                                                                 
                         Maximum copy resolution : Approx. 600 x 600 dpi                                     
                         Copy features 2‐up output, Auto exposure, Auto fit, AutoFit, Cloning,               
                         Collation, Colour balance, Colour saturation, Lighter/Darker,                       
                         Reduce/Enlarge, Sharpness                                                           
                         Scan file formats: JPEG, Linearized PDF (set via Embedded Web Server),              
                                                                                              Page 129 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         PDF, PDF/A, Password‐protected PDF, Searchable PDF, TIFF, XPS                       
                         Scan drivers: TWAIN, WIA (Network only)                                             
                         Scan destinations: Scan to Network (via FTP/SMB), Scan to USB, Scan to              
                         email                                                                               
                         Media Handling                                                                      
                         Output capacity: min. 250 sheets                                                    
                         Document handler: Single‐pass Duplex Automatic Document Feeder                      
                         Capacity: min. 50 sheets                                                            
                         Paper capacity Tray (Multipurpose tray): min. 150 sheets                            
                         Tray 1: min.550 seets                                                               
                         Tray 2 (optional): min. 550 sheets                                                  
                         Paper size Tray (Multipurpose tray): Custom sizes: 76.2 x 127 mm to                 
                         216 x 356 mm                                                                        
                         Tray 1: Custom sizes: approx. 148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm                          
                         Tray 2 (optional): Custom sizes: approx. 148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356                  
                         mmTLCI: 97                                                                          
                         Cooling System: Fan                                                                 
                         Dimming: Yes, Built‐In Dimmer                                                       
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐204 Adjustable desks Sit‐Stand Workstation                                                            
                         Screen: ≤30"                                                                        
                         Capacity: 4.5–15.9 kg                                                               
                         Lift: 38.1 cm                                                                       
                         Footprint = (89 x 59 cm)                                                            
                         Fits on desk surfaces (61 cm) deep or larger                                        
                         Keyboard tray dimensions = (64 x 23 cm). Recommended maximum                        
                         keyboard width = (45 cm)                                                            
 L02‐2‐205 Ergonomic office chairs Feature:                                                                  
                         Comfort, 5 Support Wheels, Height Adjustment, Tilt Adjustment,                      
                         Lumbar Support Adjustment                                                           
                         Technical specifications:                                                           
                         ‐ Dimensions 64 x 64 x 102 cm                                                       
                         ‐ Material ABS + Aluminum + Nylon                                                   
                         Supplied Included                                                                   
                         Office Chair Ergonomic Office Chair Lumbar Support                                  
                         Set Bolt                                                                            
                         Usage Guide                                                                         
                                                                                              Page 130 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
 L02‐2‐206 Full studio bundle Features:                                                                      
                         Active Media Reference Monitors,                                                    
                         Flexible rear panel                                                                 
                         Technical Specifications                                                            
                         Microphone Preamp                                                                   
                         Type XLR Female Balanced                                                            
                         Frequency Response: approx. (±3.0 dB) 20 Hz to 20 kHz                               
                         Input Impedance (Balanced) : approx. 1200Ω                                          
                         THD+N (unwtd, 1 kHz @ +4 dBu Output, Unity Gain) approx. < 0.008%                   
                         S/N Ratio (Unity Gain, Ref. = +4 dBu, 20 Hz to 22 kHz) : approx > 95 dB             
                         Common Mode Rejection Ratio (1 kHz, 55 dB Gain): approx. > 45 dB                    
                         Gain Control Range: approx. (± 2 dB) +6 dB to +52 dB                                
                         Max Input Level (Unity Gain, 1 kHz @ 0.5% THD+N) ‐3 dBu                             
                         Phantom Power : max. (±2 VDC) +48 VDC                                               
                         Instrument Input                                                                    
                         Type ¼" TS Female Unbalanced                                                        
                         Input Impedance : min. 0.5 MΩ                                                       
                         Gain Control Range : approx (± 2 dB) +2d B to +48 dB                                
                         Line Outputs                                                                        
                         Type : ¼" Balanced                                                                  
                         Output Impedance: max. 51Ω                                                          
                         Headphone Output                                                                    
                         Type ¼" TRS Active Stereo                                                           
                         Maximum Output: 60 mW/Ch @ 60Ω Load                                                 
                         Frequency Response: approx (±1.0 dB) 20 Hz ‐ 30 kHz                                 
                         MIDI I/O                                                                            
                         Type Dual 5‐pin Female DIN                                                          
                         Digital Audio                                                                       
                         ADC Dynamic Range (A‐wtd, 48 kHz Sample Rate) 105 dB                                
                         DAC Dynamic Range (A‐wtd, 48 kHz Sample Rate) 105 dB                                
                         Bit Depth 24                                                                        
                         Reference Level for 0 dBFS +4 dBu                                                   
                         Supported Sample Rates (kHz) 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96                                     
                         Power USB 2.0 bus‐powered                                                           
                         Physical                                                                            
                         Dimensions 1/3U (steel chassis)                                                     
                         Height : 5.5” (139.7 mm)                                                            
                         Depth : 1.75" (44.45 mm)                                                            
                         Width : 5.5” (139.7 mm)                                                             
                         Supplied Including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                                                                                              Page 131 of 132
Technical Specification Sheet                                                                                
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
 L02‐2‐207 Web camera    Features:                                                                           
                         ‐4K premium with HDR                                                                
                         ‐Windows Hello support                                                              
                         ‐ Noice Cancelling mics                                                             
                         Technical Spec:                                                                     
                         Camera: min. 13 Megapixel                                                           
                         Resolution : min. approx. 4036x2160 pixel/30fps or 1920x1080/60fps                  
                         Digital zoom :min. 5x                                                               
                         Lens and Sensor Type: 4K sensor / glass lens                                        
                         Focus Type: Auto‐focus                                                              
                         Diagonal Field of View (FOV): approx. 90 degree, adjustable to 78 or 65             
                         Horizontal Field of View (FOV): approx. 82.1 degree, adjustable to                  
                         70.42                                                                               
                         Vertical Field of View (FOV): approx. 52.2 degree, adjustable to 43.3               
                         microphone range: approx. 1,22 m                                                    
                         Supplied including:                                                                 
                         All Standart Acessories                                                             
                         ‐ All Power and Connection Cables for Assembling                                    
                         Operation and Maintenance Manual Book in English                                    
                         Transport to Location, Instalation, Trial Run and Initial Usage Training,           
                         warranty manufacture                                                                
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                                             
                                                                                              Page 132 of 132
Tenders also won by PT Mahardika Karya
Authority
16 September 2025Pengadaan Artificial Intelligence Dan Big Data Untuk Meningkatkan Kinerja Penanganan Perkara Kejaksaan Ri Tahun 2025Kejaksaan Republik IndonesiaRp 192,748,478,000
1 March 2022Pengadaan Contaiment Fasilitas Abls-2 Dan Absl-3 Untuk Uji Prakilinis Menggunakan Non-Human PrimatesBadan Riset dan Inovasi NasionalRp 130,000,000,000
4 September 2023Paket Eqj-01b - Pengadaan Equipment For Engineering Laboratories & Social Sceince Laboratories Universitas JambiKementerian Pendidikan dan KebudayaanRp 35,390,736,000
12 September 2023Pengadaan Alkes Rumah Sakit Bhayangkara Tk. IV Mimika Luas 4.063 MKepolisian Negara Republik IndonesiaRp 22,456,300,000
14 March 2024Pembangunan Kawasan Beserta Tugu Simpang Mahir-Mahar Palangka Raya (Lanjutan)Provinsi Kalimantan TengahRp 19,050,000,000
27 June 2023Penataan Kawasan Gedung KantorPemerintah Daerah Provinsi PapuaRp 17,500,000,000
16 March 2015Belanja Sarpras PosyanduRp 10,522,800,000
3 June 2020Penataan Kawasan Museum Galuh Pakuan Dan Lansekap Situs Jambansari Kabupaten CiamisKementerian Pekerjaan Umum dan Perumahan RakyatRp 10,325,000,000
2 December 2014Pengadaan Perangkat Dan Aplikasi Educatif Multikonten Untuk SmpPemerintah Daerah Kabupaten Rokan HilirRp 10,321,000,000
5 November 2020Konsolidasi Pengadaan Sarung Tangan Latex Pemilihan Tahun 2020 Paket 4 (Jatim, Bali, Ntb, Ntt, Papua, Papua Barat)Komisi Pemilihan UmumRp 9,798,000,000